PCS-9705 X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X R2.35

9 2 9 2 9 2
171 1 71 71
1 PCS-9705
Bay Control Unit
Instruction Manual
9 2 9 2 9 2
171 1 71 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
171 1 71 171
NR Electric Co., Ltd.
9 2 9 2 9 2
171 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
171 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
171 171 171
Preface
Preface
Introduction
2 2 2
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
9 9 9
71 71 71
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
1 1 1
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods
and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed
information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Health and Safety
2 2 2
The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
71 9 71 9 71 9
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to be maintained in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
1 1 1
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
 Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
2 2 2
system to which it is being connected;
71 9 71 9 71 9
Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
 1
isolate, ground, and label it;
1 1
Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;
 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit i
Date: 2018-11-22
Preface
DANGER! means that death, severe personal injury and considerable equipment damage
will occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
WARNING! means that death, severe personal and considerable equipment damage
could occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION! means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety
9 2
precautions are disregarded.
9 2 9 2
71 71 71
NOTICE! is particularly applied to device damage and resulting damage of equipment.
1 DANGER!
1 1
NEVER allow an open current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
device while the primary system is live. Open CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage that causes death.
WARNING!
2 2 2
ONLY qualified personnel should work on or near this device. This personnel MUST be
9 9 9
71 71 71
familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this manual.
During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high voltage.
1 1 1
Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from improper
behavior.
WARNING!
Do NOT touch the exposed terminals of this device while the power supply is on. The
generated high voltage causes death, injury, and device damage.
WARNING!
2 2 2
Thirty seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be
9 9 9
present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
71 71 71
1 1 1
CAUTION!
 Earthing
Securely earth the device earthing terminal.
 Operating environment
ONLY use the device within the range of ambient environment and in an
environment free of abnormal vibration.
ii PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit
Date: 2018-11-22
Preface
 Ratings
Check the input ratings BEFORE applying AC voltage/current and power supply to
the device.
 Printed circuit board
9 2 2
Do NOT attach or remove printed circuit board if the device is powered on.
9 9 2
71 71 71
 External circuit
1 1
Check the supply voltage used when connecting the device output contacts to
external circuits, in order to prevent overheating.
 Connection cable
1
Carefully handle connection cables without applying excessive force.
NOTICE!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing

features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is compatible with the
product in your hand.
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
Copyright © 2018 NR. All rights reserved.
2 2 2
We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination
9 9 9
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.
71 71 71
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.
1
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
1
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.
Headquarters: 69, Suyuan Avenue, Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China

1
Tel: +86-25-87178888
Fax: +86-25-87178999
Manufactory: 18, Xinfeng Road, Jiangning, Nanjing 211111, China Website: www.nrec.com
P/N: ZL_PCS-9705_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X Version: R2.35
PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit iii
Date: 2018-11-22
Preface
Documentation Structure
The manual provides a functional and technical description of this device and a comprehensive
set of instructions for the device’s use and application.
All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below.
1
9 2
Introduction
9 2 9 2
2
1 71 1 71
Brief introduction of the application, functions and features.
Technical Data
1 71
Lists of the technical data such as electrical specifications, mechanical specifications, ambient
temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type tests and accuracy
limits.
3 Operation Theory
Comprehensive and detailed functional description.
4 Supervision
2 2
Automatic self-supervision function of device.
9 9 9 2
71 71 71
5 Management
6 1 1 1
Management function (measurement, recording, metering, etc.) of this device.
Hardware
Description of plug-in modules and definition of pins.
7 Settings
Setting lists including system settings, communication settings and etc.
8 Human Machine Interface

Description of the HMI panel, LCD display, menu tree and a detailed operating guide
9
2
Configurable Function
9 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
Brief introduction of configurable functions and configuration software.
1
10 Communication
1
Supported conmmunication protocol details. 1
11 Installation
Recommendation for unpacking, handling, inspection and storage with a guide to the
mechanical and electrical installation. A typical wiring connection is also indicated.
iv PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit
Date: 2018-11-22
Preface
12 Commissioning
Commissioning recommendation for comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of
device.
13 Maintenance
2
General maintenance policy.
9 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
14 Decommissioning and Disposal
1 1
General decommissioning and disposal policy.
15 Revisions History
List of document revisions and update records.
1
Typographic and Graphical Conventions
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables so that the type of designator can be
obviously derived from the illustration.
The following symbols may be used in drawings:
&
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
AND gate
≥1 1 OR gate
1 1
Comparator
BI Binary signal via opto-coupler
I>
2 2
Input signal from comparator with setting
2
SET
EN
71 9 71 9 71
Input signal of logic setting for function enabling 9
SIG
1 1 1
Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler
XXX Output signal
Timer
t
Time (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)
t
PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit v
Date: 2018-11-22
Preface
10ms 0ms
Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay drop off (0ms), non-settable]
[XXX] 0ms
Timer (delay pickup, settable)
0ms [XXX]
Timer (delay drop off, settable)
[XXX] [XXX]
1 9 2 9 2
Timer (delay pickup, delay drop off, settable)
9 2
17
IDMT
1 71
Timer (inverse-time characteristic)
1 71
Symbol Corresponding Relationship
Basic
A, B, C L1, L2, L3 R, Y, B
AN, BN, CN L1N, L2N, L3N RN,YN, BN
ABC L123 RYB
U (voltage) V U
2 2 2
Example
Ia, Ib, Ic, I0
1 9 IL1, IL2, IL3, IN
1 9 9
IR, IY, IB, IN
71
17 17
Ua, Ub, Uc VL1, VL2, VL3 UR, UY, UB
1
Uab, Ubc, Uca VL12, VL23, VL31 URY, UYB, UBR
U0, U1, U2 VN, V1, V2 UN, U1, U2
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
vi PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit
Date: 2018-11-22
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
Table of Contents
9 2 9 2
1 Introduction ..................................................................................... 1-a
9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
1.1 Application ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Functions ......................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1 Measurement ....................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.2 Configurable Function .......................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.3 Miscellaneous Function........................................................................................................ 1-6
1.2.4 Communication .................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.3 Features............................................................................................................ 1-7
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
List of Figures
1 1 1
Figure 1.1-1 Typical Ethernet networking scheme .................................................................. 1-1
Figure 1.1-2 Typical application diagram of PCS-9705 (Single bay, 4CT/5VT) ..................... 1-2
Figure 1.1-3 Typical application diagram 1 of PCS-9705 (General, 13VT)............................. 1-2
Figure 1.1-4 Typical application diagram 2 of PCS-9705 (General, 13VT)............................. 1-3
Figure 1.1-5 Typical application diagram of PCS-9705 (Dual bays, 7CT/8VT) ...................... 1-3
Figure 1.1-6 Typical application diagram of PCS-9705 (Transformer Unit, 12CT/12VT) ...... 1-4
Figure 1.1-7 Typical application diagram 1 of PCS-9705 (Extended General, 24VT) ........... 1-4
9 2 9 2
Figure 1.1-8 Typical application diagram 2 of PCS-9705 (Extended General, 24VT) ........... 1-4
9 2
1
List of Tables
71 1 71 1 71
Table 1.1-1 PCS-9705 series BCU .............................................................................................. 1-1
Table 1.2-1 Maximal configuration of PCS-9705 (4U 19" rack) ............................................... 1-5
Table 1.2-2 Maximal configuration of PCS-9705 (4U 9.5" rack) .............................................. 1-5
PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit 1-a
Date: 2018-11-22
1 Introduction
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
1-b PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit
Date: 2018-11-22
1 Introduction
1.1 Application
PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit (abbreviated as BCU) is used for bay level controlling and monitoring
in power grid. It is suitable for application in Substation Automation System (abbreviated as SAS)
with distributed control IEDs.
9 2 9 2
PCS-9705 can be applied into SAS via Ethernet network in using NR private 103 protocol or IEC
9 2
71 71 71
61850-8-1. It can also send/receive Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (abbreviated as
1
GOOSE) message in station level network.
1 1
Remote
Control
Centre PCS-9785
Satellite-
Maintenance Engineering PCS-9799 Synchronized
Server A Server B Clock
Workstation Workstation Station Manager
Printer
Ethernet network
Clock Synchronization Bus

PCS-9882
Ethernet Switch
2 2 2
PCS-9794
9 9 9
Protocol converter
71 71 71
PCS-9705 PCS-900, PCS-9600
BCU
1 1 1
relays
Third-party IEDs
Figure 1.1-1 Typical Ethernet networking scheme
PCS-9705 is designed for controlling and monitoring switchgears such as circuit breaker,
disconnector, and earthing switch. Additionally, it supports tap changer control for transformer and
shunt reactor.
PCS-9705 can be used for both single and multiple bay arrangements in the following
applications.
2 2 2
Table 1.1-1 PCS-9705 series BCU
Application
1 9 Subtype Arrangement
1 9 71 9
Analog input source
17 17
App1 Single bay (4CT/5VT) Single circuit breaker Line, feeder
App2 General (13VT)

Common signals in
substation
1½ circuit breakers
1
Busbars (up to 4 sections)
Double branches for the low-voltage side of

App3 Dual bays (7CT/8VT) transformer
arrangement
0.4kV station transformer
Extended General Common signals in
App4 Busbars (up to 8 sections)
(24VT) substation
App5 Transformer Unit Transformer unit (3 or 4 Each side of transformer.
PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit 1-1
Date: 2018-11-22
1 Introduction
Application Subtype Arrangement Analog input source

(12CT/12VT) windings)
Application diagrams of PCS-9705 are listed in the following figures.
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 PCS-9705 1
(Single bay)
71
4U (Ua,Ub,Uc,UN)
CB
4I (Ia,Ib.Ic,IN)
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1U
1 71 1 71
Figure 1.1-2 Typical application diagram of PCS-9705 (Single bay, 4CT/5VT)
CB
3U 3U
CB
9 2
PCS-9705
9 2 9 2
71 71 71
(General) CB
1 3U 1 1 3U
1U
Figure 1.1-3 Typical application diagram 1 of PCS-9705 (General, 13VT)
1-2 PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit
Date: 2018-11-22
1 Introduction
CB
4U (Ua,Ub,Uc,UN) 4U (Ua,Ub,Uc,UN)
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
CB
1 PCS-9705
(General)
1 1
4U (Ua,Ub,Uc,UN)
1U
Figure 1.1-4 Typical application diagram 2 of PCS-9705 (General, 13VT)
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
1U
1 1 1
CB
3U
3I
CB
3U
1 9 2 9 2 PCS-9705
9 2
17 71 71
(Dual bays)
1 1
CB
3I
1U
Figure 1.1-5 Typical application diagram of PCS-9705 (Dual bays, 7CT/8VT)
Date: 2018-11-22
1 Introduction
3I
CB
3U
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 3I
CB
3U 1 71 3U
CB
3I
1 71
3U
PCS-9705
CB
(Transformer)
3I
9 2 9 2 9 2
Figure 1.1-6 Typical application diagram of PCS-9705 (Transformer Unit, 12CT/12VT)
71 71 71
CB CB
13U 3U
1 3U
1 3U
CB
CB
PCS-9705
CB (Extended CB
General)
3U 3U 3U 3U
Figure 1.1-7 Typical application diagram 1 of PCS-9705 (Extended General, 24VT)
9 2 CB
9 2 9
CB
2
1 71
4U (Ua,Ub,Uc,UN)
4U (Ua,Ub,Uc,UN)
1 71 4U (Ua,Ub,Uc,UN)
1 71
4U (Ua,Ub,Uc,UN)
CB
CB
PCS-9705
(Extended
General)
4U (Ua,Ub,Uc,UN) 4U (Ua,Ub,Uc,UN)
Figure 1.1-8 Typical application diagram 2 of PCS-9705 (Extended General, 24VT)
Date: 2018-11-22
1 Introduction
4U Ua, Ub, Uc and external residual voltage input (UN)
4I Ia, Ib, Ic and external residual current input (IN)
3U Ua, Ub and Uc
3I Ia, Ib and Ic
1U
9 2 Monophase voltage input
9 2 9 2
1 71
1.2 Functions
NOTICE!
1 71 1 71
The I/O quantities listed in the following table are the maximal numbers. These I/O
quantities will be influenced by each other.
Please consult the corresponding Manufacture Ordering Table or NR sales

representative for specific I/O configuration.
Table 1.2-1 Maximal configuration of PCS-9705 (4U 19" rack)
2 2 2
Configuration App 1 App 2 App 3 App 4 App 5
9 9 9
AC analog input
1 1 71
4CT + 5VT 13VT 7CT + 8VT 24VT 12CT + 12VT
(Conventional CT/VT)
17 17 1
DC analog input Max. 16
DC analog output Max. 4 N/A
Max. 114 Max. 116 Max. 112 Max. 137 Max. 129
Binary input configurable + configurable + configurable + configurable + configurable +
12 fixed 10 fixed 14 fixed 10 fixed 18 fixed
Binary output Max. 50 (25 groups) normally open contacts in 5 BO modules
Max. 20 (10 groups) duplicated normally open
Duplicated binary outputs N/A
contacts in 4 BO modules
Supported CB number
for closing synchronism 1 N/A 2 N/A 1
2 2 2
check
9 9 9
Programmable Max. 30 (15 groups) normally open contacts in 3 Max. 20 (10 groups) normally
71 71 71
interlocking logic output BO modules open contacts in 2 BO modules
1
Configuration
AC analog input
App 11
Table 1.2-2 Maximal configuration of PCS-9705 (4U 9.5" rack)
App 2 1 App 3
4CT + 5VT 13VT 7CT + 8VT

(Conventional CT/VT)
DC analog input N/A
DC analog output N/A
Max. 51 configurable + 12 Max. 53 configurable + 10 Max. 49 configurable + 14
Binary input
fixed fixed fixed
Date: 2018-11-22
1 Introduction
Configuration App 1 App 2 App 3

Binary output Max. 20 (10 groups) normally open contacts in 2 BO modules
Duplicated binary outputs N/A
Supported CB number
for closing synchronism 1 N/A 2
2 2 2
check
Programmable
1 9 1 9 N/A
71 9
17 17
interlocking logic output
1.2.1 Measurement

1
Conventional CT/VT sampling method with AC AI module in using electrical cable (24
samples per cycle)
 Transducer input in DC for temperature, humidity, etc.
1.2.2 Configurable Function

 Programmable binary input
 Programmable binary output
2 2 2
 Programmable software & hardware interlocking logic output
71 9
Programmable LED indicators
71 9 71 9


1
1.2.3 Miscellaneous Function
VT circuit supervision
CT circuit supervision
1 1
 Self diagnostic
 Device power supply supervision
 Event Recorder including 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision
events, 256 control logs and 1024 device logs
Clock synchronization methods
2 2 2

71 9
Conventional
71 9
PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level
71 9
1 1 1

 IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level
 PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via optical coupler
 PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical coupler
 SAS
 SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network
Date: 2018-11-22
1 Introduction
 SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
 Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol
 Advanced
 IRIG-B (Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface
9 2 9 2
PPS (Fiber): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface
9 2
71 71 71
1.2.4 Communication


1 1
RS-485/TTL port (IRIG-B signal) for clock synchronization
1
Ethernet ports conform to NR private 103 or IEC 61850 protocol over TCP/IP
 Support of IEC 61850 Ed1 & Ed2
1.3 Features
 PCS-9705 adopts a fully closed chassis with a complete panel. Completely isolation for
electronic and electrical system is provided.
9 2 9 2 9 2
Back plug-in module structure is adopted. Electrical and electronic circuits are strictly
71 71 71
separated to enhance EMC immunity performance.
1 1 1
 PCS-9705 adopts NR's new UAPC hardware platform, 16 bits parallel A/D converter, graphic
dot matrix LCD, and real time multi-task operating system for industrial purpose to realize the
high capacity, high precision, fast and real-time information processing. With the
high-precision parallel A/D converter, synchronization sampling can be conducted for all the
AC signals to ensure the accuracy of analog quantity measurement (up to the 15th harmonic
component).
 Software and hardware clock synchronization are both adopted with 1ms timing accuracy to
ensure the resolution of Sequence of Events (abbreviated as SOE).
 Large-scale LCD providing graph and text makes a convenient human-machine interaction.
2 2 2
 Low power consumption and wide ambient temperature range.
71 9 71 9 71 9
Support of IEC61850 and NR private 103 protocols to fulfill all the requirements of substation
communication.

1 1
Powerful auxiliary PC software configuration tools
1
Date: 2018-11-22
1 Introduction
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
Date: 2018-11-22
2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
Table of Contents
9 2 9 2
2 Technical Data ................................................................................. 2-a
9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
2.1 Electrical Specification ................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 AC Current Input................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 AC Voltage Input................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.3 Device Power Supply ........................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.4 DC Analog Input ................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.5 DC Analog Output ................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.6 Binary Input .......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.7 Binary Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
9 2 9 2 9
2.2 Mechanical Specification ................................................................................ 2-3
2
1 71 1 71
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity .............................................................. 2-3
1 71
2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ......................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.2 Ethernet Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.3 Clock Synchronization Port .................................................................................................. 2-4
2.5 Type Test .......................................................................................................... 2-4

2.5.1 Environmental Test ............................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.2 Mechanical Test .................................................................................................................... 2-5
9 2 9 2 9 2
2.5.3 Insulation Test....................................................................................................................... 2-5
1 71 1 71 1 71
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility .............................................................................................. 2-5
2.6 Management Function..................................................................................... 2-6

2.6.1 Measurement Scope and Accuracy ..................................................................................... 2-6
2.6.2 Control Performance ............................................................................................................ 2-6
2.6.3 Clock Performance ............................................................................................................... 2-6
2.6.4 Binary Input Signal ............................................................................................................... 2-6
Date: 2018-11-22
2 Technical Data
2.7 Terminal Connecter ......................................................................................... 2-6

2.8 Certification...................................................................................................... 2-7
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
Date: 2018-11-22
2 Technical Data
2.1 Electrical Specification

2.1.1 AC Current Input
Phase rotation ABC or ACB
2 2 2
Rated frequency (fn) 50Hz or 60Hz
9 9 9
Rated current (In) 1A 5A
71 71 71
Linear to 0.05In~2In
1 1 1
Thermal withstand capability
-continuously 2In
-for 10s 12In
-for 1s 30In
-for half a cycle 75In
Burden (@In) 0.2VA/phase 0.4VA/phase
2.1.2 AC Voltage Input

Phase rotation ABC or ACB
Rated voltage (Un, phase-to-phase) 100V~140V
Linear to (phase-ground) 1V~140V
9 2
Thermal withstand capability Phase-Ground
9 2 9
Phase-Phase
2
71 71 71
-continuously 140V 225V
-10s 200V 346V
-1s
1
Burden (@Un)
250V
1
0.10VA/phase
433V
1
2.1.3 Device Power Supply
Standard IEC 60255-11:2008
Rated voltage (Un) 110/125Vdc, 220/250Vdc, 110/220Vac
Operating range 88~300Vdc, 88~265Vac
Permissible AC ripple voltage Max. 15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
Burden (4U 19" rack, App1, 2, 3) Typical module configuration Maximal module configuration
Quiescent condition 14W 32W
Operating condition
1 9 2 15W
1 9 2 45W
9 2
71
Burden (4U 9.5" rack, App1, 2, 3) Typical module configuration Maximal module configuration
17 17
Quiescent condition 14W 17W
Operating condition
Burden (4U 19" rack, App4, 5)
Quiescent condition
18W
Typical module configuration
9.5W
18W
26W
1
Maximal module configuration
Operating condition 10.5W 35W
2.1.4 DC Analog Input

Input range 0-20mA 0-5V 0~10V 0-48V 0-220V
Date: 2018-11-22
2 Technical Data
235Ω or 4.4kΩ or N/A or 54.2kΩ or 248kΩ or

Input resistance
75Ω 110kΩ 110kΩ 1510kΩ 1510kΩ
Accuracy 0.5% or 0.1%
2.1.5 DC Analog Output
2 2 2
Output range
1 9 4-20mA
1 9 0-10V
71 9
17 17
Load Max.600Ω Min.1000Ω
Dielectric tests
Accuracy
2000Vac
0.5% 1
2000Vac
0.5%
2.1.6 Binary Input

Rated voltage 24V 30V 48V
Rated current 1.20mA 1.50mA 2.40mA
Pickup voltage 16.8-28.8Vdc 21-36Vdc 33.6-57.6Vdc
Max. drop-off voltage 12Vdc 15Vdc 24Vdc
Max. permissible voltage 100Vdc
Withstand voltage (continue) 2000Vac, 2800Vdc
Response time
9 2 1ms
9 2 9 2
1 71
Rated voltage
Rated current
Pickup voltage
110V
1
1.10mA
77-132Vdc
71 125V
1.25mA
87.5-150Vdc 1
220V
2.20mA 71
154-264Vdc
250V
2.50mA
175-300Vdc
Max. drop-off voltage 55Vdc 62.5Vdc 110Vdc 125Vdc
Max. permissible voltage 300Vdc
Withstand voltage (continue) 2000Vac, 2800Vdc
Response time 1ms
2.1.7 Binary Output

Maximal system voltage 380Vac, 250Vdc
Test voltage across open contact 1000V RMS in 1min
9
Continuous carry
2 5A
9 2 9 2
71 71 71
8A@3s
12A@1s
1 1 1
Short duration current
16A@0.5s
30A@0.2s
0.65A@48Vdc
0.35A@110Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms) 0.30A@125Vdc
0.20A@220Vdc
0.15A@250Vdc
Pickup time Max. 8ms (typical 3ms)
Date: 2018-11-22
2 Technical Data
Drop off time 5ms

Durability Min. 10,000 operations
2.2 Mechanical Specification

Mounting Way Flush mounted
Chassis color
1 9 2 Silver grey
9 2 9 2
71 71
Weight per device Approx. 12kg
17
Chassis material Aluminum alloy
Location of terminal
Device structure
Protection class standard
1
Rear panel of the device
1
Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated front plate
IEC 60225-1:2009
HMI side IP51
Terminal side IP30
Other sides IP50
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity

2 2 2
Operating temperature -40°C to +70°C (Readability of display may be impaired below -20°C)
9 9 9
Transport and storage temperature -40°C to +70°C
17
Altitude 1
Permissible humidity
1 71
5%-95%, without condensation
Max. 3000m
1 71
2.4 Communication Port
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port
Baud rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997
Maximal capacity 32
Transmission distance Max. 500m
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
2 2 2
Twisted pair Screened twisted pair cable
9
2.4.2 Ethernet Port
71 71 9 71 9
1 1 1
2.4.2.1 Electrical Port
Connector type RJ-45

Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Transmission standard 10Base-T/100Base-TX
Transmission distance Max. 100m
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997 or IEC 61850
Date: 2018-11-22
2 Technical Data
2.4.2.2 Optical Port (Station Level)
Characteristic Glass optical fiber

Connector type ST or SC
Fiber type Multi-mode (50/125μm, 62.5/125μm)
Transmission distance Max. 2km
Wave length
1 9 2 1310nm
9 2 9 2
71 71
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
17
Receiving power Min. -30.0dBm
Margin
2.4.2.3 Optical Port (Process Level) 1

Min. +3.0dB
1
Connector type LC ST
Fiber type Multi-mode (50/125μm, 62.5/125μm)
Transmission distance Max. 2km
Wave length 1310nm 850nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Margin
9 2 Min. +3.0dB
9 2 9 2
71 71 71
2.4.3 Clock Synchronization Port
Type 1
2.4.3.1 Electrical Port
Transmission distance
1
Differential RS-485
Max. 500m
1
Maximal capacity 32
Timing standard PPS, PPM, IRIG-B
2.4.3.2 Optical Port (if available)

Connector type ST
Fiber type
9 2 9 2
Multi-mode (50/125μm, 62.5/125μm)
9 2
71 71 71
Wave length 850nm
Margin
1
2.5 Type Test
1
Min. +3.0dB
1
2.5.1 Environmental Test
Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1:2007
Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic IEC60068-2-30:2005
Date: 2018-11-22
2 Technical Data
2.5.2 Mechanical Test

Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I
2.5.3 Insulation Test

Standard
1 9 2 IEC 60255-27-2013
9 2 9 2
71 71
2.8kV, DC, 1min
Dielectric withstand
17
2.0kV, AC, 1min
Impulse voltage
Overvoltage category
Insulation resistance
5kV
1
Class III
Min. 100MΩ @500Vdc
1
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility
IEC 60255-26-2013, Class III
1MHz burst disturbance test Common mode: 2.5kV
Differential mode: 1.0kV
IEC 60255-26-2013, Class IV
Electrostatic discharge test For contact discharge: ±8kV
2 2 2
For air discharge: ±15kV
1 9 9
IEC 60255-26-2013, Class III
71 71 9
17
Frequency sweep
Radio frequency interference tests
1 1
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz
IEC 60255-26-2013, Class IV
Fast transient disturbance tests Power supply, I/O, Earth: ±4kV, 5kHz for 15ms, 100kHz for 0.75ms
Communication terminals: ±2kV, 5kHz for 15ms, 100kHz for 0.75ms
IEC 60255-26-2013, Class IV
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: 1.2/50μs
Surge immunity test
Common mode: ±4kV
Differential mode: ±2kV
Power frequency magnetic field IEC 61000-4-8:2009, Class V
2 2 2
immunity 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
1 9
Pulse magnetic field immunity
71 9
IEC 61000-4-9:2001, Class V
71 9
17
6.4/16μs, 1000A/m
1 1
IEC 60255-26-2013, Class III
Conducted RF electromagnetic
Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: 10Vrms, 150kHz~80MHz
disturbance
Spot frequency, f=27MHz/68MHz
IEC 60255-26-2013, Class A
Power frequency immunity Common mode: 300V
Differential mode: 150V
IEC 60255-26-2013, Class A
Conducted emission
f=0.15MHz~0.5MHz/0.5kHz~30MHz
Radiated emission IEC 60255-26-2013, Class A
Date: 2018-11-22
2 Technical Data
f=30MHz~230MHz/230MHz~1000MHz
Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10:2001, Class V
immunity 100kHz & 1MHz, 100A/m
Power supply performance IEC 60255-26-2013
- Voltage dip Max. 200ms for dip to 40% of rated voltage (Un = 220Vdc) without reset
2 2 2
- Voltage short interruption Max. 60ms for interruption falls from and recoveries to 80% of rated
9 9 9
voltage (Un = 220Vdc) without reboot
1 71
2.6 Management Function
2.6.1 Measurement Scope and Accuracy 1 71 1 71
Item Range Accuracy
Phase range 0Deg ~ 360Deg ± 1Deg
Frequency 40Hz ~ 65Hz 0.01Hz
Current 0.01In~2.00In 0.2% of rating
Voltage 0.05Un~1.20Un 0.2% of rating
Active power (W) 0.05Un~1.20Un, 0.01In~2.00In 0.5% of rating at unity power factor
Reactive power (VAr) 0.05Un~1.20Un, 0.01In~2.00In 0.5% of rating at zero power factor
Apparent power (VA) 0.05Un~1.20Un, 0.01In~2.00In 0.5% of rating
Energy (Wh)
9 2 9 2
0.05~1.20×Un, 0.01~2.00×In
9 2
0.5% of rating at unity power factor
71 71 71
Energy (VArh) 0.05~1.20×Un, 0.01~2.00×In 0.5% of rating at zero power factor
1
2.6.2 Control Performance
Control mode
Accuracy of local control
1
Local or remote
1s
1
Accuracy of remote control 3s
2.6.3 Clock Performance

Real time clock accuracy 3s/day
Accuracy of GPS synchronization 1ms
External time synchronization IRIG-B (200-98), PPS, PPM or SNTP protocol
2 2 2
2.6.4 Binary Input Signal
71 9
Resolution of binary input signal 1ms
71 9 71 9
1 1 1
Binary input mode Potential-free contact
Resolution of SOE 2ms
2.7 Terminal Connecter

Connecter Type Wire Size
Screw terminal, 2.5mm 2~4.0mm2 lead
AC current input For 4.0mm2 lead, ONLY dedicated terminal cable lug provided by NR Electric
can be adopted.
AC voltage input Screw terminal, 1.5mm2 lead
Date: 2018-11-22
2 Technical Data
Connecter Type Wire Size

Power supply Screw terminal, 1.0mm2~2.5mm2 lead
I/O contact Screw terminal, 1.0mm2~2.5mm2 lead
Earthing connection BVR type, 2.5mm²~6.0mm2 lead
2.8 Certification
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
 ISO 9001:2008
1 1 1
 ISO 14001:2004
 OHSAS 18001:2007
 ISO 10012:2003
 CMMI L5
 EMC: 2014/30/EU, EN60255-26:2013
 LVD: 2014/35/EU, EN60255-27:2014
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 171
Date: 2018-11-22
2 Technical Data
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
3 Operation Theory
Table of Contents
9 2 9 2
3 Operation Theory ............................................................................ 3-a
9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
3.1 AC Analog Input ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Function Description............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Settings................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 DC Analog Input............................................................................................... 3-1

3.2.2 Settings................................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 Binary Input ...................................................................................................... 3-2

9 2 9 2 9 2
3.3.2 Functional Block ................................................................................................................... 3-4
1 71 1 71 1 71
3.3.3 I/O Signals ............................................................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.4 Settings................................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.4 Binary Output ................................................................................................... 3-5

3.4.2 Functional Block ................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.3 I/O Signals ............................................................................................................................ 3-6
3.4.4 Settings................................................................................................................................. 3-6
3.5 Tap Changer Control ....................................................................................... 3-6
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
3.5.2 Settings................................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.6 DC Analog Output ............................................................................................ 3-9

3.6.2 Settings................................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.7 Interlocking Logic Output ............................................................................. 3-10

3.7.1 Function Description........................................................................................................... 3-10
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
3.7.2 Functional Block ................................................................................................................. 3-10
3.7.3 I/O Signals .......................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.7.4 Settings............................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.8 Synchro-check for Manual Switching ........................................................... 3-11
9 2 9 2 9 2
3.8.1 Function Description............................................................................................................3-11
71 71 71
3.8.2 Functional Block ................................................................................................................. 3-14
1 1 1
3.8.3 I/O Signals .......................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.8.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.8.5 Settings............................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.9 Circuit Breaker Wear Statistic ...................................................................... 3-22

3.9.2 Function Block .................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.9.3 I/O Signals .......................................................................................................................... 3-23
9 2 9 2 9 2
3.9.4 Settings............................................................................................................................... 3-23
71 71 71
3.10 VT Circuit Supervision ................................................................................ 3-25
1 1 1
3.10.1 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-25
3.10.2 Functional Block ............................................................................................................... 3-26
3.10.3 I/O Signals ........................................................................................................................ 3-26
3.10.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.10.5 Settings............................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.11 CT Circuit Supervision ................................................................................ 3-27

3.11.1 Function Description ......................................................................................................... 3-27
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
3.11.3 I/O Signals ........................................................................................................................ 3-27
1 1 1
3.11.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................. 3-27
3.11.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................. 3-27
3.12 Residual Overvoltage Supervision............................................................. 3-28

3.12.3 I/O Signals ........................................................................................................................ 3-28
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
3.12.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................. 3-28
3.12.5 Settings............................................................................................................................. 3-28
3.13 Undervoltage Supervision .......................................................................... 3-29

9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
3.13.3 I/O Signals ........................................................................................................................ 3-30
1 1 1
3.13.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................. 3-30
3.13.5 Settings............................................................................................................................. 3-30
3.14 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) ............................... 3-31

3.14.1 Application ........................................................................................................................ 3-31
3.14.3 Settings............................................................................................................................. 3-34
3.15 Clock Management ...................................................................................... 3-34
9 2 9 2 9 2
List of Figures
1 71 1 71 1 71
Figure 3.3-1 Debouncing technique for binary input .............................................................. 3-3
Figure 3.3-2 Voltage dependence for binary inputs ................................................................. 3-3
Figure 3.8-1 Synchro-check mode selection logic diagram ................................................. 3-15
Figure 3.8-2 Synchro-check logic diagram............................................................................. 3-15
Figure 3.8-3 Relationship between reference voltage and synchronous voltage .............. 3-16
Figure 3.8-4 Synchronism check logic diagram .................................................................... 3-17
2 2 2
Figure 3.8-5 Dead check logic diagram .................................................................................. 3-17
9 9 9
71 71 71
Figure 3.10-1 VT circuit supervision logic diagram............................................................... 3-26
1 1 1
Figure 3.11-1 CT circuit supervision logic diagram............................................................... 3-27
Figure 3.12-1 Residual overvoltage supervision logic diagram........................................... 3-28
Figure 3.13-1 Undervoltage supervision logic diagram ........................................................ 3-30
Figure 3.14-1 GOOSE sending mechanism ............................................................................ 3-32
PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit 3-c
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
3-d PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
3.1 AC Analog Input

3.1.1 Function Description
The AC AI module completes the acquisition of incoming secondary AC analog voltage and current.
The sampling rate of measurement is 80 points per cycle, and the values displayed on LCD will be
2 2 2
refreshed every 0.1s. Besides observing from the LCD, user can use the auxiliary software
9 9 9
71 71 71
PCS-Explorer or SAS system to supervise the measurement via communication protocol.
1 1 1
Here is the calculation theory of measurement:
N
U= 1 ∑ U 2 ( n)
N
n =1
N
I= 1 ∑ I 2 ( n)
N
n =1
1 N
=P ∑ [U ( n) I ( n) + U ( n) I ( n) + U ( n) I ( n)]
N n =1 a a b b c c
=Q
1 N
9 2 9 2
∑ [U ( n) I ( n − 3 N ) + U ( n) I ( n − 3 N ) + U ( n) I ( n − 3 N )]
9 2
71 71 71
N n =1 a a 4 b b 4 c c 4
P
1 1 1
CosΦ =
P2 + Q2
N The sampling rate of measurement
P, Q Active/Reactive power calculated by three-meter method
3.1.2 Settings
Access path: "Settings" -> "BCU Settings" -> "AC Calbr Settings".
NOTICE!
2 2 2
These settings are used to calibrate manually the accuracy of each analog input channel
71 9 71 9
is strongly recommended NOT to adjust it.
71 9
locates on AC AI module. The manufacturer has already configured these settings so it
1
3.2 DC Analog Input
1 1
The DC AI module completes the acquisition of incoming DC analog voltage or current, especially
for temperature, humidity or pressure transducer. After algorithm and digital RC filtering, the
measurement can achieve the accuracy 0.5%. Besides observing from the LCD of device, user can
also use SAS or the auxiliary software PCS-Explorer to supervise the measurement via
communication protocol.
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
3.2.2 Settings
"B**" in the following tables signifies the module at the No.** slot.
No. Name Default Value Range Step(Unit)
1 B**.DCAI.Opt_Type_Transducer** 0 0~3 1
1 2
B**.DCAI.Max_Transducer**
9
B**.DCAI.Min_Transducer**
1 9 2 250
1 9 2
-60000~60000
-60000~60000
1
17 17 17
 B**.DCAI.Opt_Type_Transducer**
These settings are applied to configure DC analog transducer type, and they cooperate with
the jumpers locate on DC AI module to match the type.
Value Corresponding DC Analog Input
0 0~5V
1 4~20mA
2 0~250V
3 0~48V
9 2
B**.DCAI.Max_Transducer**
9 2 9 2
71 71 71
Maximum values measured by the transducer.

1 1
If the temperature range is -50℃~+50℃, the setting value will be 50.
1
Minimum values measured by the transducer.
If the temperature range is -50℃~+50℃, the setting value will be -50.
3.3 Binary Input

9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
Electrical signals are introduced into the device via optical isolation and then converted into digital
signals. Station level GOOSE binary signals are introduced into the device via communication
1 1 1
network. These signals are configurable in using the auxiliary software PCS-Explorer.
After the filter circuit and debouncing algorithm processing, external interference can be filtered
effectively. As shown in the following figure, a well-designed debouncing technique is adopted in
this device. Binary input state change within "Debouncing time" (t0-t1 can be set 0~30s) will be
ignored, in order to ensure the accuracy of the signal status. Once there is a confirmation of change
status of signal (start from t1), a SOE record will be noted in the device.
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
Binary input state
1 9 2 1 9 2 Validate the binary
9 2
71
input state change &
17 17
write it into SOE
1
record
Debouncing
time Time
t0 t1
Figure 3.3-1 Debouncing technique for binary input
Voltage
Level
9 2 Change assurance
9 2
Change uncertain
9 2
Change forbiddance
71 71 71
300
1 1 1
175
154
2 2 2
125
9 9 9
110
71 71 71
87.5
1 1 1
77
62.5
55
33.6
24
16.8
12
0 24V 48V 110V 125V 220V 250V
Figure 3.3-2 Voltage dependence for binary inputs
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
A double point status (DPS), which usually indicates primary switchgear status, can be derived
from 2 ordinary binary inputs. The user-defined DPS is configurable through the auxiliary
configuration software PCS-Explorer. The signification of a DPS is shown in the following table. For
primary switchgear status, only the 2 status "01" and "10" indicates respectively the positions
"Open" and "Close" are valid. The other 2 status "00" and "11" will cause alarm if the alarm enabling
setting [DPOS.Map] is set. Please refer to the section "FUN Settings" in the chapter "Settings" for
more detail.
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
DPS Bit0 = 0 Bit0 = 1
1 Bit1 = 0
Bit1 = 1
3.3.2 Functional Block

1 DPS_INT
DPS_OFF
1 DPS_ON
DPS_BAD
DPOS
BI_**** NO_DPOS**
GBI_**** NC_DPOS**
DPOS**
DPOS.Alm
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
3.3.3 I/O Signals
No.
1
2
1
BI_****
GBI_****
Input Signal
1 1
Description
Opto-isolated binary inputs get from BI module.
Binary inputs get from communication network.
No. Output Signal Description
1 NO_DPOS** Double point status for normally open (abbreviated as NO) contact
2 NC_DPOS** Double point status for normally close (abbreviated as NC) contact
Double point status
3 DPOS** "DPS_INT": Intermediate-state; "DPS_OFF": Open;
"DPS_ON": Close; "DPS_BAD": Bad state.
For a synthesis double point signal, which indicates CB/DS/ES status,
2 2 2
if both the NO contact and NC contact are opened or closed, this signal
9 9 9
4 DPOS.Alm
will pick up with a time delay of “[DPOS.t_DPU_**]+[DPOS.t_Alm]” and
17
3.3.4 Settings
1 71 71
will drop off with a time delay of [DPOS.t_Alm].
1 1
1 DPOS.t_DPU_** 500 0~60000 1(ms)
2 B**.t_DPU_BI_**** 10 0~500000 1(ms)
"DPU" is the abbreviation of "Delay Pick Up". "t_DPU" refers to "debouncing time".
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
 DPOS.t_DPU_**
In order to prevent the situation that DPS NO contact and NC contact are both opened or
closed during CB/DS/ES operation process, these debouncing time settings should be
configured to be greater than the duration of mechanism operation.
 B**.t_DPU_BI_****
9 2 9 2 9
In this device, each binary input has an independent debouncing time setting.
2
1 71 1 71 1 71
The debouncing time (also called delay pickup time) of binary input is the duration for
confirming binary input state, i.e.: if binary input state changes and remains unchanged during
the duration, and then the binary input state will be confirmed by the device.
3.4 Binary Output

The control output function performs execution to primary equipment, such as CB/DS/ES
switching and tap position changer or for signaling purpose.
To ensure more security of this function, each binary output consists of power relay, fault detector
2 2 2
relay and output relay in series. An error of one relay will not cause any undesired output, to
9 9 9
enhance the dependability. Furthermore, the circuit to block control is also available to prevent
71 71 71
output by mistake during breakdown of hardware.
1 1 1
The control output function for primary equipment, which is based on the principle SBO (Select
Before Operate), can be performed from device LCD (local mode) or SCADA/CC (remote mode).
One integrated procedure of control contains:
1. Send the selection command from device LCD (local mode), or SCADA (remote mode);
2. After logic judgment function, the device returns "selection success" or "fail reason";
3. Send the execution command from device LCD (local mode), or SCADA (remote mode) if the
result "selection success" is received;
4. After logic judgment function, the device does or cancels the execution and returns
2 2
corresponding "execution success" or "fail reason";
9 9 9 2
71 71 71
Synchro-check function is available along with the control output function for CB during a bay
1 1 1
combination to power grid.
Interlocking control function is also available and configurable to accomplish different switching
scheme.
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
CSWI
CSWI**.CILO.EnOpn CSWI**.out_Rly_Opn
CSWI**.CILO.EnCls CSWI**.out_Rly_Cls
9 2 25.BI_RSYN
9 2 CSWI**.out_Sig_Opn
9 2
71 71 71
BI_Rmt/Loc CSWI**.out_Sig_Cls
1 1
CSWI**.in_State_Opn
CSWI**.in_State_Cls
CSWI**.in_Alm_Output
1
3.4.3 I/O Signals
No Input Signal .Description
1 CSWI**.CILO.EnOpn Permission signal of opening output: "1" permit; "0" forbid.
2 CSWI**.CILO.EnCls Permission signal of closing output: "1" permit; "0" forbid.
3 25.BI_RSYN The result of synchronism check: "1" succeeded; "0" failed.
4 BI_Rmt/Loc
1 9 2 2
The control mode: "1" remote; "0" local.
9 9 2
71 71
5 CSWI**.in_State_Opn The status of opening output relay: "1" ready; "0" abnormal.
17
6 CSWI**.in_State_Cls The status of closing output relay: "1" ready; "0" abnormal.
7
No.
1
CSWI**.in_Alm_Output
Output Signal
CSWI**.out_Rly_Opn
1
Opening output relay operates.
Description
1
The status of output circuit: "1" abnormal; "0" normal.
2 CSWI**.out_Rly_Cls Closing output relay operates.

3 CSWI**.out_Sig_Opn Opening output operates via communication network.
4 CSWI**.out_Sig_Cls Closing output operates via communication network.
3.4.4 Settings
No. Name Default Value Range Step(Unit) Description
The holding time of a normally open
2 2 2
1 CSWI**.t_PW_Opn 500 0~60000 1(ms)
9 9 9
contact for opening output
71 71 71
2 CSWI**.t_PW_Cls 500 0~60000 1(ms)
1 1 1
contact for closing output
3.5 Tap Changer Control

A tap changer is a connection point selection mechanism along a power transformer winding that
allows a variable number of turns to be selected in discrete steps. A transformer with a variable
turn's ratio is produced, enabling stepped voltage regulation of the output. The tap selection may
be made via an automatic or manual tap changer mechanism.
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
If only one tap changer is required, manually operated tap points are usually made on the high
voltage (primary) or lower current winding of the transformer to minimize the current handling
requirements of the contacts. However, a transformer may include a tap changer on each winding
if there are advantages to do so. For example, in power distribution networks, a large step-down
transformer may have an off-load tap changer on the primary winding and an on-load automatic
tap changer on the secondary winding or windings. The high voltage tap is set to match long-term
9 2 9 2 9 2
system profile on the high voltage network (typically supply voltage averages) and is rarely
71 71 71
changed. The low voltage tap may be requested to change positions multiple times each day,
without interrupting the power delivery, to follow loading conditions on the low-voltage (secondary
1
winding) network.
1 1
The on-load design is also called on circuit tap changer or On Load Tap Changer (OLTC). For
many power transformer applications, a supply interruption during a tap change is unacceptable,
and the transformer is often fitted with a more expensive and complex OLTC mechanism
electronic.
The control and supervision of OLTC is treated as a special kind of binary output in this device.
The binary outputs "BO_StepDownTP" and "BO_StepUpTP" are used to descend and rise
respectively the tap position in comply with the principle SBO. During a tap changer control
process, if "running tap" occurs, the tap position will be out of control (steps up or down
9 2 9 2
command to cut out the power supply of the tap position changer's motor mechanism.
9 2
continuously). An output contact "BO_EmergStopTP" is then provided to issue an emergency stop
NOTICE!
1 71 1 71 1 71
By default, the 3 binary outputs for tap position changer control are fixed according to
the following table.
Pin No.
Application Slot No.
Descend Raise Emergency stop
13-14 15-16 17-18
4U 19" rack, App 1, 2, 3 14
BO_CtrlOpn14 BO_CtrlCls14 BO_CtrlOpn15
13-14 15-16 17-18
4U 19" rack, App 4, 5 16
05-06 07-08 09-10
2 2 2
4U 9.5" rack, App 1, 2, 3 08
71
3.5.2 Settings
9 71 9 71 9
No.
2
1
84.Num_Tap_Pos
84.Code_Tap_Pos
Name
1 26
0
1
Default Value Range
0~26
0~3
Step(Unit)
3 84.t_DPU_Tap_Pos 500 0~6000 1(ms)
4 84.En_EmergStop_Tap_Pos 0 0 or 1
5 84.t_EmergStop_Tap_Pos 500 0~60000 1(ms)
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
 84.Num_Tap_Pos
The maximum number of transformer’s tap position, it will take effect only when
[84.Code_Tap_Pos] =3:
 84.Code_Tap_Pos
2 2
This is the access mode selection of the tap position of the transformer.
9 9 9 2
71 71 71
There are 4 modes ("0", "1", "2" and "3") available.
1 1 1
 "0": No binary inputs will be used for Tap Position Indication (abbreviated as TPI).
 "1": Binary inputs 15 to 20 will be used as Binary-Coded Decimal code (abbreviated as

BCD) while binary inputs 21 to 40 will not be used.
Binary input 15 is the least significant bit however binary input 20 is the most significant bit.
The first 4 bits are for binary numbers while the 5th bit and the 6th bit represent ten and
twenty respectively.
Some examples are shown as follows:
 If the transformer tap position is 5, then binary inputs 20 to 15 indicate as "00 0101".
9 2 9 2 9 2
If the transformer tap position is 15, then binary inputs 20 to 15 indicate as "01 0101".
71 71 71
 If the transformer tap position is 25, then binary inputs 20 to 15 indicate as "10 0101".
1 1 1
 "2": Binary inputs 15 to 24 will be used to indicate "0~9", binary inputs 25, 26 and 27
denote the tap position lower than 10 or between 10 to 19 or over 19 respectively. Binary
inputs 28 to 40 will not be used.
 If the transformer tap-position is 5, then binary inputs 27 to 15 indicate as

"0010000100000".
 If the transformer tap-position is 15, then binary inputs 27 to 15 indicate as

"0100000100000".
If the transformer tap-position is 25, then binary inputs 27 to 15 indicate as
2 2 2

9 9 9
"1000000100000".
71 71 71
 "3": Binary inputs 15 to 40 represent tap positions 1 to 26 respectively. Only one binary
1 1
input would be set as 1 among binary inputs 15 to 40.
1
Binary input 15 indicates the lowest tap position of the transformer.
Binary input 40 indicates the highest tap position of the transformer.
 If binary input 15 is configured as 1 and binary inputs 16 to 40 are all set as 0, it

indicate the tap position is 1.
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
 If binary input 40 is configured as 1 and binary inputs 15 to 39 are all set as 0, it

indicate the tap position is 26.
 84.t_DPU_Tap_Pos
This is the duration for confirming transformer tap position (abbreviated as TP). If TP changes
and remains unchanged for this duration, the TP will be confirmed. Otherwise, the binary input
9 2
state will not be confirmed.
9 2 9 2
71 71 71
 84.En_EmergStop_Tap_Pos
1 1 1
Enable/Disable the function to stop slip of TP immediately. During tap changer control process,
if "slip TP" occurs, the TP will be out of control, and it will step up or down continuously.
An output contact "BO_EmergStopTP" is provided to issue an emergency stop command to

block the power source of the motor of the TP changer.
 84.t_EmergStop_Tap_Pos
This is used to configure the holding time of output contact "BO_EmergStopTP".
3.6 DC Analog Output
2
9 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
Regulation command from remote control center or local station control can be realized in sending
1 1 1
DC analog output to regulate a control object such as the active/reactive power output of
generator.
Technician can define the maximal and minimal values of the DC analog output (physical
signification) to simply the visual understanding.
3.6.2 Settings
1 DCAO**.Opt_Type_Regu 1 0, 1 1
2 DCAO**.Min_Regu 0.00 -60000.00~60000.00 0.01
2 2 2
3 DCAO**.Max_Regu 10.00 -60000.00~60000.00 0.01
71 9
DCAO**.Opt_Type_Regu
71 9 71 9
1 1 1
This setting is applied to set the DC analog output type for regulation.
0: 4~20mA; 1: 0~10V
 DCAO**.Min_Regu
Minimum regulation value (corresponds to 4mA or 0V) of DC analog output.
 DCAO**.Max_Regu
Maximum regulation value (corresponds to 20mA or 10V) of DC analog output.
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
3.7 Interlocking Logic Output

Programmable interlocking logic is available to accomplish different switching schemes. The

interlocking logic can block the device's capability of primary equipment's switching control. The
2 2 2
logic can be distributed to each IED. For station-wide interlock, an IED communicates via the
71 9 71 9
system-wide inter-bay bus (IEC 61850-8-1) and an interlocking criterion depends on the circuit
71
configuration and primary equipment status. For easy and safe implementation of the interlocking
9
1 1 1
logic, the criterion are configurable to meet any specific requirement.
The interlocking logic function is enabled by setting the parameter [CSWI**.En_Opn_Blk] and
[CSWI**.En_Cls_Blk]. When executing a switching output, if the interlocking logical criterions are
met, besides the internal software interlock, this device also provides hardware interlock with the
help of PLC module (normally open contact output controlled by the result of interlocking logical
calculation).
LOCK
9 2 BI_****
9 2 CSWI**.CILO.EnOpn
9 2
71 71 71
GBI_**** CSWI**.CILO.EnCls
1 1 1
Other binary signal
3.7.3 I/O Signals

No. Input Signal Description
1 BI_**** Opto-isolated binary inputs get from BI module.
2 GBI_**** Binary inputs get from communication network.
3 Other binary signal Binary status such as alarm.
1 CSWI**.CILO.EnOpn Permission signal of opening output: "1" permit; "0" forbid.
2 CSWI**.CILO.EnCls Permission signal of closing output: "1" permit; "0" forbid.
3.7.4 Settings
9 2 9 2 9 2
No.
1
1 71 Name
CSWI**.En_Opn_Blk
Default Value
0
1 71
Range
0 or 1
1 71
Description
Enable (1)/Disable (0) the interlocking logic control

function for opening output.

2 CSWI**.En_Cls_Blk 0 0 or 1
function for closing output.
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
3.8 Synchro-check for Manual Switching

The synchro-check takes effect while closing a circuit breaker to combine bay to power grid. It
acquires information across the CB and compares the information with synchro-check related
2 2 2
settings. Closing output command is only given if all synchro-check criterions are satisfied.
71 9 71 9 71 9
This device supports synchro-check for manual closing (remote and local). Several check modes
are available, including no-check mode, synchronism check mode and dead check mode.
1 1
3.8.1.1 Single Busbar Arrangement (with PCS-9705 Single Bay)
Voltage selection function is not required for this busbar arrangement.

1
Bus
Ua
UB
{ Ub
Uc
CB
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
PCS-9705
1 UL(USyn ) 1 1
Line
3.8.1.2 Double Busbars Arrangement (with PCS-9705 Single Bay)
For double busbars arrangement, selection of appropriate voltage from Bus 1 and Bus 2 for check
is required to be done by external circuit. After that, BCU will take line VT signal as reference to
2 2
check synchronism with the bus voltage after voltage selection.
9 9 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
Bus2
Bus1
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71UB
{
Ua
Ub
Uc
1 71 1
CB
71
PCS-9705
UL(USyn )
Line
3.8.1.3 One and a Half Breakers Arrangement (with PCS-9705 Dual Bays)
2 2 2
For one and a half breakers arrangement, the reference voltage will synchronize with Bus 1
9 9 9
71 71 71
voltage signal for closing the circuit breaker at Bus 1 side.
1 1 1
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
Bus1
9 2 UB1
9 2 9 2
1 71 Ua
1 71 1 71
Line 1
UL1
{ Ub
Uc
PCS-9705
Line 2
Ua
9
UL2
2{ Ub
9 2 9 2
71 71 71
Uc
1 UB2
1 1
Bus2
3.8.1.4 Transformer Unit Arrangement (with PCS-9705 Transformer Unit)
For transformer unit (3 or 4 windings), the reference side and the synchronization side can be
2 2 2
selected in using the settings [25.Opt_Side_Measmt] and [25.Opt_Side_Syn].
71 9 71 9 71 9
1 1 1
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
HVS Bus
Ia
Ib
Ic } I_HVS
CB
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 { 71 71
Ua
1 1 1}
U_HVS Ub
Uc
Ia
Ia Ib I_LVS_BR
Ib
Ic } I_MVS Ic
MVS Bus CB CB LVS BR Bus
Ua Ua
U_MVS
{ Ub
Uc
Ub
Uc } U_LVS_BR
2 2 2
Ua
{
CB
9 9 9
U_LVS Ub
Uc
71 7 1 71
Ia
} Ib I_LVS
1 1 1
Ic
LVS Bus
25
XXXX.Alm_VTS_Measmt 25.Alm_SynChkMode
in_bi_vol_chk 25.BI_RSYN_OK
in_bi_syn_chk
9
3.8.3 I/O Signals
2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
1
2
3
1
XXXX.Alm_VTS_Measmt
in_bi_vol_chk
in_bi_syn_chk
1
Alarm indicates VT circuit's fail.
Input signal to activate dead check mode. 1
Input signal to activate synchronism check mode.
1 25.Alm_SynChkMode Alarm indicates error in the mode selection of synchro-check
2 25.BI_RSYN_OK "1" indicates the satisfaction of interlock logic
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
3.8.4 Logic
Several logic links for synchro-check, [25.Link_DdChk], [25.Link_SynChk] and [25.Link_LoopChk],

are listed in "Settings" -> "Logic Links" -> "Function Links". For device local control mode, the
selection of synchro-check mode is realized in using of these logic links. For device remote control
mode, the logic links should coordinate with the remote control system such as SCADA or remote
control centre.
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
NOTICE!
1 1 1
[25.Link_DdChk] and [25.Link_SynChk] can be enabled independently or together.
[25.Link_LoopChk] should be enabled uniquely. If it is enabled with either of the above

settings at the same time, there will be an alarm "25.Alm_SynChkMode" in 1s.
SET [BI_Rmt/Loc] = 1 (remote)

SET [25.HMI_Mode] = Bit 4 &
SIG Normal remote control command
SET [BI_Rmt/Loc] = 1 (remote) Synchrocheck mode is

determine d by logic links
SET [25.HMI_Mode] = Bit 2 & ≥1
Synchrocheck mode is
2 2 2
SIG Normal remote control command
determine d by SCADA/CC
SET
71 9
[BI_Rmt/Loc] = 0 (local)
71 9 71 9
1 SIG No-check is OK
1
Figure 3.8-1 Synchro-check mode selection logic diagram
1
SIG Synchronism check is OK
≥1 Synchrocheck is OK
SIG Dead check is OK
SIG Loop check is OK
Figure 3.8-2 Synchro-check logic diagram
3.8.4.1 No-Check Logic
9 2
from the synchro-check logic.
9 2 9 2
All the logic links are disabled (i.e. "0"), and a closing command will be sent out without any block
1 71
3.8.4.2 Synchronism check Logic
1 71 1 71
The comparative relationship between the reference voltage and the synchronization voltage for
synchronism check is as follow. Furthermore, the measured three-phase voltages for
synchro-check should not exceed the overvoltage threshold [25.U_OV] or lag the undervoltage
threshold [25.U_UV].
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
UL
UB
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
Figure 3.8-3 Relationship between reference voltage and synchronous voltage
UL: Line voltage; UB: Bus voltage;
This figure shows the characteristics of synchronism check element used for CB closing if both
line and busbar are live. The element operates if the voltage difference, frequency difference, slip
frequency difference and phase angle difference are all within their setting ranges.
 The difference between the reference voltage and the synchronization voltage is checked by
the following equation
9 2
|UB- UL| ≥ [25.U_Diff]
9 2 9 2
71 71 71
 The frequency difference between the reference side and the synchronization side is checked
1
by the following equation
|f(UB)-f(UL)| ≤ [25.f_Diff] 1 1
 The slip frequency difference is checked by the following equation
df/dt ≤ [25.df/dt]
 The phase difference between the reference voltage and the synchronization voltage is
checked by the following equation
∆δ ≤ [25.phi_Diff]
2 2 2
NOTICE!
71 9 71 9 71 9
If the logic setting [25.Opt_Mode_SynChk]=1, the phase difference will be fixed at 1
degree.
1 1 1
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
SIG Synchronism check mode

SET df/dt ≤ [25.df/dt]
SET ΔU ≤ [25.U_Diff]
SET Δf ≤ [25.f_Diff] [25.t_Reset] 0ms Synchronism
&
check is OK
SET Δδ ≤ [25.phi_Diff]
2 2 2
EN [XXXX.En_Alm_VTS]
SIG
1 9
XXXX.Alm_VTS_Measmt
71
&
9 71 9
17 1 1
EN [25.En_VTS_Blk_SynChk]
SET UA&B&C ≤ [25.U_UV]
SET UA&B&C ≥ [25.U_OV]

≥1
SET Usyn ≤ [25.U_UV]
SET Usyn ≥ [25.U_OV]
Figure 3.8-4 Synchronism check logic diagram
3.8.4.3 Dead Check Logic
9 2 9 2
The dead check mode checks only the synchro-check voltage. Several dead check modes are
9 2
71 71 71
supported in using the setting [25.Opt_Mode_DdChk]. The device compares measured bus
1 1 1
voltage and line voltage at both sides of circuit breaker with the settings [25.U_LvChk] and
[25.U_DdChk]. When the voltage is higher than [25.U_LvChk], the bus/line is regarded as live.
When the voltage is lower than [25.U_DdChk], the bus/line is regarded as dead.
SIG Dead check mode
SIG 25.Opt_Mode_DdChk
SET Up ≤ [25.U_DdChk] Dead

check [25.t_Reset] 0ms
SET Usyn ≤ [25.U_DdChk] criteria & Dead check is OK
selection
SET Up ≥ [25.U_LvChk]
SET Usyn ≥ [25.U_LvChk]
EN
9 2
[XXXX.En_Alm_VTS]
9 2 9 2
71 71 71
SIG XXXX.Alm_VTS_Measmt &
EN
1
[25.En_VTS_Blk_DdChk]
1
Figure 3.8-5 Dead check logic diagram
1
3.8.5 Settings
1 25.Opt_Mode_SynChk 0 0, 1 1
2 25.U_UV 10 0%Un~100%Un 1(%Un)
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
3 25.U_OV 130 120%Un~180%Un 1(%Un)
4 25.U_Diff 10 0%Un~100%Un 1(%Un)
5 25.f_Diff 0.50 0.00~3.00 0.01(Hz)
6 25.df/dt 2.00 0.10~5.00 0.01(Hz/s)
9 2
25.phi_Diff
9 2 30.00
9 2
0.10~180.00 0.01(Deg)
71 71 71
8 25.Opt_Mode_DdChk 7 1~7 1
10
11
125.En_VTS_Blk_DdChk
25.En_VTS_Blk_SynChk
25.t_Reset
1 1
5000
1 0 or 1
0 or 1
5000~30000 1(ms)
12 25.U_DdChk 30 0%Un~100%Un 1(%Un)
13 25.U_LvChk 80 0%Un~100%Un 1(%Un)
14 25.Opt_U_SynChk 0 0~5 1
15 25.phi_Comp 0 0~360 1(Deg)
16 25.t_Close_CB 0 0~1000 1 (ms)
17 25.Link_BO_Syn 0 0 or 1
18
9 2
25.Opt_Side_Measmt
9 2 0
9
0~3
2 1
71 71 71
19 25.Opt_Side_Syn 1 0~3 1

1
25.Opt_Mode_SynChk
1 1
The [25.phi_Diff] will be invalid and the voltages phase angle difference will be fixed to 1
degree during synchronism check if this setting is set to "1". While loop check logic will not be
affected.
This setting is specially recommended to use when closing a generator-terminal circuit

breaker in power plant.
 25.U_UV
Threshold of under voltage to block synchro-check for CB closing, and it is expressed as a
2 2 2
percentage.
71 9 71 9 71 9
If either side of CB voltage for synchro-check is less than this setting, synchro-check for CB
closing will be disabled.
1 1
 [XXXX.Uab_Pri] or [XXXX.Ubc_Pri] or [XXXX.Uca_Pri] < [25.U_UV] *
[XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt].
1
 [XXXX.Uab_Sec] or [XXXX.Ubc_Sec] or [XXXX.Uca_Sec] < [25.U_UV] *
 [XXXX.Ua_Pri] or [XXXX.Ub_Pri] or [XXXX.Uc_Pri] < [25.U_UV] *

[XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt]/√3
 [XXXX.Ua_Sec] or [XXXX.Ub_Sec] or [XXXX.Uc_Sec] < [25.U_UV] *
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
[XXXX.U2n_VT_Measmt]/√3.
 [XXXX.Usyn_Pri] < [25.U_UV] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Syn].
 [XXXX.Usyn_Sec] < [25.U_UV]*[XXXX.U2n_VT_Syn].
 25.U_OV
9 2 9 2 9 2
Threshold of over voltage to block synchro-check for CB closing, and it is expressed as a
71 71 71
percentage.
1 1 1
If either side of CB voltage for synchro-check is more than this setting, synchro-check for CB
closing will be disabled.
 [XXXX.Uab_Pri] or [XXXX.Ubc_Pri] or [XXXX.Uca_Pri] > [25.U_OV] *

 [XXXX.Uab_Sec] or [XXXX.Ubc_Sec] or [XXXX.Uca_Sec] > [25.U_OV] *

 [XXXX.Ua_Pri] or [XXXX.Ub_Pri] or [XXXX.Uc_Pri] > [25.U_OV] *

 [XXXX.Ua_Sec] or [XXXX.Ub_Sec] or [XXXX.Uc_Sec] > [25.U_OV] *
9 2
9 2 9 2
71 71 71
 [XXXX.Usyn_Pri] > [25.U_OV] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Syn].

1 1
 [XXXX.Usyn_Sec] > [25.U_OV]*[XXXX.U2n_VT_Syn].
25.U_Diff
1
Threshold of voltage difference to block CB closing, and it is expressed as a percentage.
If the voltage difference between both sides of the CB for synchro-check is greater than this
setting, CB closing will be disabled.
If [25.Opt_U_SynChk] is configured as phase voltage, CB closing will be disabled if any of the

following events is met:
 [25.U_Diff_Pri] > [25.U_Diff] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt]/√3.
9 2 9 2
 [25.U_Diff_Sec] > [25.U_Diff] * [XXXX.U2n_VT_Measmt]/√3.
9 2
1 71 1
any of the following events is met: 71
1 71
If [25.Opt_U_SynChk] is configured as phase-to-phase voltage, CB closing will be disabled if
 25.f_Diff
Threshold of frequency difference between both sides of the CB (Δf = |f-fsyn|) for
synchro-check.
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
If the Δf between both sides of the CB is greater than this setting, CB closing will be disabled.
 25.df/dt
Threshold of df/dt (change rate of frequency difference) between both sides of the CB for
synchro-check.
9
disabled.
2 9 2 9 2
If the df/dt between both sides of the CB is greater than this setting, CB closing will be

71
25.phi_Diff
1 1 71 1
Threshold of phase-angle difference between both sides voltages of the CB for
synchro-check.
71
If the phase-angle difference between the 2 voltages on both sides of the CB is greater than
this setting, CB closing will be disabled.
 25.Opt_Mode_DdChk
The "Dead check mode" is determined by the setting [25.Opt_Mode_DdChk].
[25.Opt_Mode_DdChk] Corresponding dead check criterion
2 2 2
1 Both the incoming side and the reference side adopt dead check.
1 9 71 9 71 9
The incoming side adopts live check and the reference side adopts dead check.
17
3 The incoming side adopts dead check and the reference side adopts live check.
5 1
The reference side adopts dead check.
The incoming side adopts dead check. 1

6 Or:
The incoming side adopts dead check and the reference side adopts live check.
Or:
Or:
2 2 2
Both the incoming side and the reference side adopt dead check.
71 9 71 9 71 9
[25.Opt_Mode_DdChk] will only be valid when this device is set to work in "dead check
mode".
1 1 1
In the above table, the criterion for dead check is: a voltage will be regarded as dead if it is
less than [25.U_DdChk]. The criterion for live check is: a voltage will be regarded as live if it is
greater than [25.U_LvChk].
 25.En_VTS_Blk_DdChk
"1/0": Enable/Disable the block function of dead check mode if there is alarm of VT circuit
failure.
 25.En_VTS_Blk_SynChk
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
"1/0": Enable/Disable the block function of synchronism check mode if there is alarm of VT
circuit failure.
 25.t_Reset
Duration of synchro-check. The check will not precede any longer out of this range.
 25.U_DdChk
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
This setting is expressed as a percentage.
 1 1 1
In "dead check mode", a voltage will be regarded as dead if it is less than this setting.
25.U_LvChk
In "dead check mode", a voltage will be regarded as live if it is greater than this setting.
 25.Opt_U_SynChk
Synchronism voltage type.
[25.Opt_U_SynChk] Corresponding synchronism voltage type
2 2 2
0 Ua
1 9 1
1 9 Ub
71 9
17 17
2 Uc
5
Uab
Ubc
Uca
1
If [25.Opt_U_SynChk] is "0", "1" or "2", [XXXX.U1n_VT_Syn] and [XXXX.U2n_VT_Syn]
should be phase voltage.

should be phase-to-phase voltage.
Access path of [XXXX.U1n_VT_Syn] and [XXXX.U2n_VT_Syn]: "Settings" -> "System

Settings"
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
 25.phi_Comp
1 1 1
Compensation angle for incoming voltage during synchro-check. The summation of the
reference voltage angle and this setting will be compared with the incoming voltage angle.
 For voltage adoption from different sides of transformer;
 For voltage adoption of different phases;
 Other factors.
 25.t_Close_CB
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
Closing time of circuit breaker.
It is the time from receiving closing command pulse until the CB is completely closed.
 25.Link_BO_Syn
"1/0": Enable/Disable the output function of synchronism binary output in PWR module (B20).
9 2 9 2 9 2
If the device is in local control mode (i.e. [BI_Rmt/Loc]=0) and all the conditions of
71 71 71
synchronism check are satisfied, with [25.Link_BO_Syn]=1, following NO contact(s) (normally
open) will be closed according to application and selection of synchronism check side:
1
App 1 (Single Bay)
App 3 (Dual Bays)

B20 08~09
1
B20 04~05 (Bay 1), 06~07 (Bay 2)
1
App 5 (Transformer) B20 04~05 (HVS), 06~07 (MVS), 08~09 (LVS), 10~11 (LVS BR)
 25.Opt_Side_Measmt
The selection of measurement (reference) side for synchronism check.
0: HVS, high voltage side;
1: MVS, middle voltage side;
9 2
2: LVS, low voltage side;
9 2 9 2

1 71
3: LVS BR, low voltage side branch;
25.Opt_Side_Syn
1 71 1 71
The selection of synchronism side for synchronism check.
NOTICE!
9 2 9 2 9 2
These two settings, [25.Opt_Side_Measmt] and [25.Opt_Side_Syn], are only valid for
71 71 71
the application PCS-9705 Transformer Unit. Their values cannot be the same. Else,
1 1
there will be an alarm [Alm_Settings_RSYN].
3.9 Circuit Breaker Wear Statistic 1

The circuit breaker wear is caused by breaking current when a CB is tripped by a protection
operation or a control command.
During a CB tripping process, when the BCU detects a CB position change from close to open, the
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
CB wear statistic process starts. After a tripping execution, within 10s, if the CB open position is
detected, the CB wear statistic process will be effective. During a CB wear statistic process, the
maximal breaking current is recorded to be compared with the current in the CB wear table, which
is provided by the CB manufacturer. Then, BCU can calculate the CB wear status.
Generally, the value of "CBWear.Stat" is proportional to the root-mean-square value of the
9 2 9 2 9 2
breaking current. If it is greater than the corresponding threshold [CBWear.Th_Wear], the alarm
"CBWear.Alm " will be issued. This alarm will be displayed in the LCD of BCU and can be sent to
71 71 71
SAS.
1
3.9.2 Function Block
1 CBWear
1
CBWear.Ia CBWear.N_Trp
CBWear.Ib CBWear.Alm
CBWear.Ic CBWear.Stat
52a
52b
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
3.9.3 I/O Signals
No.
1
2
1
CBWear.Ia
CBWear.Ib
Input Signal
1 Description
1
The measured three-phase currents through the CB
3 CBWear.Ic
4 52a The CB CLOSE position
5 52b The CB OPEN position
1 CBWear.N_Trp The tripping counter
2 CBWear.Alm The CB wear alarm
3 CBWear.Stat The CB wear statistic
3.9.4 Settings
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
3
1
CBWear.Th_Wear
CBWear.t_Stat
CBWear.Ibrk_01
1 8000
100
0.0
1 0~10000
10~200
0.0~1000.0
1
1(ms)
0.1(kA)
4 CBWear.Ibrk_02 4.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
5 CBWear.Ibrk_03 8.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
6 CBWear.Ibrk_04 12.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
7 CBWear.Ibrk_04 16.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
8 CBWear.Ibrk_04 20.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
9 CBWear.Ibrk_04 24.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
10 CBWear.Ibrk_04 28.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
11 CBWear.Ibrk_04 32.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
12
9 2
CBWear.Ibrk_04
9 2 36.0
9 2
0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
71 71 71
13 CBWear.Ibrk_04 40.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
14
15
16
1
CBWear.Ibrk_04
CBWear.Ibrk_04
CBWear.Ibrk_04
1 44.0
48.0
52.0
1 0.0~1000.0
0.0~1000.0
0.0~1000.0
0.1(kA)
0.1(kA)
0.1(kA)
17 CBWear.Ibrk_04 56.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
18 CBWear.Ibrk_04 60.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
19 CBWear.Wear_01 0 0~10000 1
20 CBWear.Wear_02 4 0~10000 1
21 CBWear.Wear_03 33 0~10000 1
22 CBWear.Wear_04 92 0~10000 1
23
9 2
CBWear.Wear_05
9 2 164
9 2
0~10000 1
71 71 71
24 CBWear.Wear_06 256 0~10000 1
1 1 1
25 CBWear.Wear_07 369 0~10000 1
26 CBWear.Wear_08 502 0~10000 1
27 CBWear.Wear_09 655 0~10000 1
28 CBWear.Wear_10 829 0~10000 1
29 CBWear.Wear_11 1024 0~10000 1
30 CBWear.Wear_12 1239 0~10000 1
31 CBWear.Wear_13 1475 0~10000 1
32 CBWear.Wear_14 1731 0~10000 1
33 CBWear.Wear_15 2007 0~10000 1
34
9 2
CBWear.Wear_16
9 2 2304
9 2
0~10000 1
71 71 71
35 SwitchType** 1 1~4 1
1 1 1
36 Max_CBOpCap** 7 1~7 1
 CBWear.Th_Wear
This is the CB wear alarm threshold. If one of the wear statistic status (i.e.: "CBWear.Stat",
"CBWear.Stat_A", "CBWear.Stat_B" and "CBWear.Stat_C") is greater than the threshold, the
alarm will be issued.
 CBWear.t_Stat
This is the CB position changing period (from closing to opening). It should be greater than
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
the arc-suppression time.
 CBWear.Ibrk_**
The CB breaking current curve.
These parameters depend on the CB wear table provided by CB manufacturer.
9 2
CBWear.Wear_**
9 2 9 2
71 71 71
The CB wear curve.

1 1 1
SwitchType**
The option of switchgear type.
1: Load break switch; 2: Disconnector; 3: Earthing switch; 4: High speed earthing switch;
 Max_CBOpCap**
CBOpCap is an enumeration representing the physical capabilities of the breaker to operate.

It reflects the switching energy as well as additional blocking due to some local problems.
CBOpCap is always less or equal to Max_CBOpCap and will be implemented based on CB
9 2
spring charge status.
9 2 9 2
71 71 71
Breaker Operating Capability Value
1 None
Open
1
Close-Open
1
2
3
1
Open-Close-Open 4
Close-Open-Close-Open 5
Open-Close-Open-Close-Open 6
More 7
NOTICE!
More values (8...n) describe higher operating capabilities. A new value, i.e. a new line in
2 2 2
the table must start alternating with "Close" and "Open" and must end always with
71 9
"Open".
3.10 VT Circuit Supervision

71 9 71 9
1
NOTICE! 1 1
"XXXX" in this section is the wildcard of bay identification that can be set by the
software PCS-Explorer, such as "BayMMXU", "Bus1_MMXU", "Bay1_MMXU",
"BayMHAN".
The purpose of this function is to detect whether the VT analog input is normal. Because some
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
function, such as synchro-check, will be influenced by a voltage input failure.
VT circuit failure can be caused by many reasons, such as fuse blown due to short-circuit fault,
poor contact of VT circuit, VT maintenance and so on. The device can detect the failure, issue
alarm signal and block relevant function.
VT circuit supervision can detect a single-phase, two-phase or three-phase VT failure. Under
9 2 9 2
normal condition, the device continuously supervises the input voltage from VT. However, if the
9 2
71 71 71
device is under abnormality, VT circuit supervision may be disabled.
1 1 1
The VT circuit failure alarm will be issued if the input positive-sequence voltage is lower than 30V
or negative-sequence voltage exceeds 8V. This alarm signal will pick up with a time delay of 1.25s
and will drop off with a time delay of 10s.
VTS
XXXX.En_Alm_VTS
XXXX.Alm_VTS_Measmt
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
3.10.3 I/O Signals
No.
6 1 Input Signal
XXXX.En_Alm_VTS 1
corresponding setting
Description
1
VT circuit supervision enabling input, which is activated by the its

1 XXXX.Alm_VTS_Measmt Alarm indicates VT circuit's fail.
3.10.4 Logic
SIG U2 > 8V
≥1
SIG U1 < 30V
&
SIG Ia > 0.04In
1 9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71
SIG Ib > 0.04In ≥1
17
SIG Ic > 0.04In
1 1
& 1.25s 0
XXXX.Alm_VTS_Measmt
EN [XXXX.En_Alm_VTS]
Figure 3.10-1 VT circuit supervision logic diagram
3.10.5 Settings
No. Name Default Value Range Description
1 XXXX.En_Alm_VTS 0 0 or 1 Enable/Disable alarm function of VT circuit supervision.
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
3.11 CT Circuit Supervision

NOTICE!
2 2 2
"BayMHAN".
71 9
71 9 71 9
1 1 1
The purpose of this function is to detect whether the CT analog input is normal.
Under a normal condition, secondary current input is continuously supervised by detecting the
residual and negative-sequence current. If the residual current is larger than 0.06A or the
negative-sequence current is greater than 0.10A, a CT circuit error is considered. The related
functions are going to be blocked, an alarm will be issued with a time delay of 10s, and drop off
with a time delay of 10s after the error disappears.
CTS
9 2 9 2
XXXX.En_Alm_CTS
9 2
71 71 71
XXXX.Alm_CTS
1
3.11.3 I/O Signals
No. Input Signal
1 1
Description
CT circuit supervision enabling input, which is activated by the its
1 XXXX.En_Alm_CTS
1 XXXX.Alm_CTS Alarm indicates CT circuit's fail.
3.11.4 Logic
2 2 2
SIG I0 > 0.06In
9 9 9
≥1
10s 0
&
1 1 71
SIG I2 > 0.10In [XXX X.Alm_CTS]
17 17
EN [XXX X.En_Alm_CTS]
3.11.5 Settings
Figure 3.11-1 CT circuit supervision logic diagram
1
1 XXXX.En_Alm_CTS 0 0 or 1 Enable/Disable alarm function of CT circuit supervision.
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
3.12 Residual Overvoltage Supervision

NOTICE!
2 2 2
"BayMHAN".
71 9
71 9 71 9
1 1 1
The purpose of this function is to detect whether the residual VT analog input is normal.
Under a normal condition, secondary residual voltage input is continuously supervised. If the
residual voltage is larger than a defined setting, a residual overvoltage is considered. The related
ROV
XXXX.En_Alm_ROV
9 2 9 2 XXXX.Alm_ROV
9 2
1 71
3.12.3 I/O Signals
No. Input Signal 1 71 1
Description
71
Residual overvoltage supervision enabling input, which is activated by
1 XXXX.En_Alm_ROV
the its corresponding setting
1 XXXX.Alm_ROV Alarm indicates residual overvoltage
3.12.4 Logic
SET 3U0 > [XXXX.UN_Alm_ROV] 10s 1

& XXXX.Alm_ROV
2
[XXXX.En_Alm_ROV]
2 2
EN
71 9 71 9
Figure 3.12-1 Residual overvoltage supervision logic diagram
71 9
No.
1
3.12.5 Settings
Name
1 Default Value
1 Range Step(Unit)
1 XXXX.En_Alm_ROV 0 0 or 1 1
2 XXXX.UN_Alm_ROV 10 0%Un~100%Un 1(%Un)
 XXXX.En_Alm_ROV
"1/0": Enable/Disable the alarm function for residual overvoltage supervision.
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
 XXXX.UN_Alm_ROV
This setting is expressed as a percentage for the emission threshold of the alarm
[XXXX.Alm_ROV].
If (
2
[XXXX.En_Alm_ROV] = 1,
9 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
[XXXX.UN_Pri] > [XXXX.UN_Alm_ROV] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt],
1
Hold time > 10s
) 1
Then [XXXX.Alm_ROV] = 1; /* Issue [XXXX.Alm_ROV] */
1
If (
[XXXX.Alm_ROV] = 1,
[XXXX.UN_Pri] < [XXXX.UN_Alm_ROV] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt],
Hold time > 1s
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
Then [XXXX.Alm_ROV] = 0; /* Return [XXXX.Alm_ROV] */
1
3.13 Undervoltage Supervision
NOTICE!
1 1
"BayMHAN".
The purpose of this function is to detect whether the phase voltage is normal.
2 2 2
Under a normal condition, secondary voltage input is continuously supervised. If one of the
71 9 71 9 71 9
three-phase voltages is smaller than a defined setting, an undervoltage is considered. The related
1 1 1
UV
XXXX.En_Alm_UV
XXXX.Alm_UV
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
3.13.3 I/O Signals

Undervoltage supervision enabling input, which is activated by the its
1 XXXX.En_Alm_UV
1 XXXX.Alm_UV
9 2 2
Alarm indicates undervoltage
9 9 2
71 71 71
3.13.4 Logic
1
SET
EN
Up < [XXXX.U_Alm_UV]
[XXXX.En_Alm_UV]
1 &
10s
1
1
XXXX.Alm_UV
Figure 3.13-1 Undervoltage supervision logic diagram
3.13.5 Settings
1 XXXX.En_Alm_UV 0 0 or 1 1
2 XXXX.U_Alm_UV 10 0%Un~100%Un 1%(Un)
 XXXX.En_Alm_UV
9 2 9 2 9 2

1 71
XXXX.U_Alm_UV
1 71
"1/0": Enable/Disable the alarm function for undervoltage supervision.
1 71
[XXXX.Alm_UV].
If (
[XXXX.En_Alm_UV] = 1,
Ua or Ub or Uc < [XXXX.U_Alm_UV] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt],
Hold time > 10s,
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
Then [XXXX.Alm_UV] = 1; /* Issue [XXXX.Alm_UV] */
1
If (
[XXXX.Alm_UV] = 1,
1 1
All Ua&Ub&Uc > [XXXX.U_Alm_UV] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt],
Hold time > 1s,
Then [XXXX.Alm_ROV] = 0; /* Return [XXXX.Alm_UV] */
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
3.14 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)

3.14.1 Application
Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) is the mechanism defined in IEC 61850
standard used to satisfy fast message demand of SAS, and provides means of fast information
2 2 2
transmission and exchange under network communication conditions. In case of any status
71 9 71 9 71 9
change, Intelligent Electronic Device (abbreviated as IED) will use status change message to
transmit binary objects in high speed. Information exchange among IEDs is realized by GOOSE.
1 1 1
This device can receive and send GOOSE signals in P2P mode or networking mode. For
important application case, in order to ensure no loss of data during transmission, it is
recommended to configure dual network mode, and duplicated GOOSE networks of process level
are independent of the network of station level. The process level network is separated from
station level network can ensure that important information, such as tripping signal, is not affected
by data in MMS network.
In order to avoid network storm, ring network is not recommended for GOOSE network
configuration. Duplicated protection configuration and their GOOSE networks shall be totally
independent of each other, to ensure that in case of any network fault in one set of duplicated
protection configuration, the other set will not be affected.
9 2
9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
IEC 61850 provides substation configuration language (SCL) based on XML, which has
standardized description of substation systems and device configuration. There are four types of
SCL files:
 SSD: Substation Specification Description
 SCD: Substation Configuration Description
 ICD: IED Capability Description
 CID: Configured IED Description
The manufacturers provide ICD file by its own IED configuration tool, which describes the data
model and ability of IED. SSD file is generated by system configuration tool, which includes single
9 2 9 2 9 2
line diagram of primary system, logical node of primary device, type definition of logical node, etc.
71 71 71
ICD file and SSD file are used as inputs of SCD file which is generated by SCD configuration tool,
including a substation′s primary system configuration (including related information configuration
1 1 1
between primary system and secondary system), the secondary device configuration (including
signals describe configuration, GOOSE connection configuration), communication network and
parameters configuration. Each IED manufacturer exports its CID file after receiving SCD
configuration model.
3.14.2.1 Sending GOOSE Message
IED defines send data by defining GOOSE send dataset and GOOSE control block. GOOSE
service is directly mapped to network data link layer. To ensure important information transmission
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
priority, broadcast address is used for multi-channel transmission of information. GOOSE

message allows high-speed transmission of tripping signals, which has high transmission success
rate.
GOOSE message is not sent at fixed interval. When there is no GOOSE event, the sending
interval of GOOSE message is fixed and relatively long. However, after an event occurs, the
9 2 9 2 9 2
sending interval is set as shortest. GOOSE adopts continual retransmission to realize reliable
transmission, and during this period, the sending interval will gradually increase, until the event
71 71 71
status becomes stable. Finally, the sending interval of GOOSE message will be restored to fixed
1 1
interval again. The whole process is shown as below:
Transmission Time 1
Event
Figure 3.14-1 GOOSE sending mechanism
Where:
9 2 9 2 9 2
T0 is retransmission in stable conditions (no event for a long time), and it is configurable (typical
71 71 71
value is 5000ms).
1 1 1
T1 is shortest retransmission time after the event, and it is configurable (typical value is 2ms).
T2 is retransmission times until achieving the stable conditions time, and it is fixed at 2T1.
T3 is retransmission times until achieving the stable conditions time, and it is fixed at 4T1.
GOOSE send adopts retransmission mechanism and has 4 transmission times: T0, T1, T2, and
T3. After an event happens, a frame message will be sent, sending again after the time interval T1,
and still sending after another time interval T1. Then, respectively sending again with the time
interval T2 and T3. The sending will be continued at the time interval T0 again if no new event
happens.
2 2 2
GOOSE can send not only binary quantities but also analog quantities without high real-time
9 9 9
requirement, such as, temperature and humidity.
71 71 71
3.14.2.2 Receiving GOOSE Message
1 1 1
GOOSE receiving is controlled by GOOSE link of corresponding serial number, and provides
corresponding alarm signal according to the same serial number. After receiving GOOSE data, the
GOOSE data shall be processed accordingly, including presetting to 0, presetting to 1, maintaining
if GOOSE data is invalid (refer to the following section).
3.14.2.3 Invalid GOOSE Data and GOOSE Data Link Disconnection
In case of any of the following appears, GOOSE data will be considered as invalid.
 The next frame of GOOSE message is not received within 1.1 times maximum message
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
survival time.
 GOOSE receive link is disabled.
 Version number is inconsistent or data configuration of dataset is mismatched.
 Device′s test mode is inconsistent with the state of "Test" bit in the message.
NOTICE!
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
Each frame of GOOSE send data includes maximum message survival time, normally 2
1 1
times GOOSE heartbeat time (t0).
1
The state of "Test" bit in GOOSE message is set to 1 if the receiving control block
receives message with "Test" bit, otherwise it is set to 0 if the message without "Test" bit
is received.
If GOOSE message is not received within 2 times maximum message survival time, GOOSE data
link disconnection will be issued. For example, GOOSE publisher sets heartbeat time (t0) to 5s, so
that specified message survival time in send message is 10s. After receiving a frame of GOOSE
message, GOOSE data will be considered as invalid if the next frame is not received within 11s.
GOOSE data link disconnection will be issued if the next frame is still not received in 20s.
9 2 9 2 9 2
When adopting to disconnect network connection to test invalid data or data link disconnection,
because disconnecting network connection occurs at any time between two groups of heartbeat
71 71 71
messages, invalid GOOSE data is normally issued in 6s~11s and GOOSE data link disconnection
1 1
is normally issued in 15s~20s after disconnecting network connection.
NOTICE! 1
Invalid GOOSE data is not synchronized with GOOSE data link disconnection in time.
The former is issued when message is not received within 1.1 times maximum
message survival time, while the latter is only issued when message is not received
within 2 times maximum message survival time.
3.14.2.4 Handling Mechanism for Network Storm
The device can quickly detect network storm and handle network messages. In case of network
storm occurs in single network, the device can ensure no loss of normal network messages, so
9 2 9 2 9 2
that protection functions will not be affected. For network storm in dual network, the device can
71 71 71
ensure receive and handle messages from one of dual networks, and actual test has shown that
protection functions are basically not affected.
1
3.14.2.5 Maintenance Mechanism
1 1
GOOSE message provides a parameter, "Test", and GOOSE can be set as maintenance status by
the binary input [BI_Maintenance]. The publisher will compare the value of "Test" with that of the
subscriber. If they are consistent, the corresponding operation will be executed, otherwise, invalid
GOOSE data will be issued, which eliminates mutual effect between the device in service and the
device in maintenance.
Different from traditional contact signals, which can be enabled or disabled by corresponding logic
Date: 2018-11-22
3 Operation Theory
links, this device adopts the following modes to enable and disable corresponding signals after
applying GOOSE.
 Through comparing the value of "Test" in GOOSE message between the publisher and the
subscriber, GOOSE data is valid when they are consistent, otherwise it is invalid.
In "Test" state, the subscriber still has event recording and state display functions, to facilitate
2 2 2

9 9 9
circuit check.
71 71 71
 GOOSE send link and GOOSE receive link are provided to fulfill the selective transmission of
 1 1
GOOSE signals and isolate the publisher from the subscriber.
1
For the publisher, GOOSE will perform "AND" of data value and the state of GOOSE send link,
according to whether the data is changed, and decide whether a new round of transmission is
initiated.
3.14.3 Settings
Enable/Disable the GOOSE channel message supervision in

1 GLink_SLRL_** 1 0 or 1
station layer.
NOTICE!
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
These links are aimed to avoid issuing disconnection alarms if the corresponding
1 1 1
GOOSE channel is empty due to some situation such as the connected remote device
is out of service.
3.15 Clock Management

 Real-Time Clock
The MON module in this device has an inner real-time high-precision clock. This clock can
last for one month even if the device is switched off.
 Clock Synchronization
The clock synchronization function supports various synchronization signals, including
2 2 2
differential IRIG-B, optical fiber IRIG-B, optical fiber PPS, differential PPS, free contact
9 9 9
71 71 71
PPS/PPM, SNTP broadcast, SNTP peer-to-peer, received from a timing source device (E.g. :
PCS-9785 Satellite-Synchronized Clock).
1 1 1
Date: 2018-11-22
4 Supervision
4 Supervision
Table of Contents
9 2 9 2
4 Supervision ..................................................................................... 4-a
9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
4.1 BCU Supervision Alarm .................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 GOOSE Alarm .................................................................................................. 4-3
List of Tables
Table 4.1-1 BCU supervision alarm ........................................................................................... 4-1
Table 4.1-2 Troubleshooting for BCU supervision alarm ........................................................ 4-2
2 2 2
Table 4.2-1 GOOSE alarm ............................................................................................................. 4-4
71 9 71 9 71 9
Table 4.2-2 Troubleshooting for GOOSE alarm ........................................................................... 4-4
1 1 1
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
Date: 2018-11-22
4 Supervision
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
Date: 2018-11-22
4 Supervision
4.1 BCU Supervision Alarm

Hardware circuits and operating status of the device are self-supervised continuously. If any
abnormality is detected, alarm information or report will be displayed on the device LCD and sent
to local/remote control centre.
2 2 2
A minor abnormality may block a certain number of functions while the other functions can still
9 9 9
71 71 71
work. However, if a severe hardware failure is detected, all functions will be blocked, the LED
“HEALTHY” will be extinguished, and the output contact “BO_FAIL”, which locates in the PWR
1 1 1
module, will be electrified. Therefore, this device can no longer be in service and maintenance is
required to eliminate the failure. The alarm signals and their corresponding troubleshooting
suggestions are listed below.
NOTICE!
If the device is blocked or an alarm signal is issued, please find out its reason with the
help of self-diagnostic record. If the reason cannot be found at site, please inform the
local service or the manufacturer.
NOTICE!
2 2 2
"XXXX" is the function name substitution for bay identification such as "BayMMXU",
9 9 9
"Bus1_MMXU", "Bay1_MMXU", "Sum_MMXU", etc.
71 71 71
Table 4.1-1 BCU supervision alarm
No.
1 Item
1 Description
1
Failure Signals (Device is blocked, “HEALTHY” LED is lit off, “ALARM” LED is lit on)
The device fails.
1 Fail_Device This signal will pick up if any failure signal picks up and it will drop off when
all failure signals drop off.
2 Fail_Sample_AD Error is found during AD sampling.
3 Fail_Settings Error is found during setting check.
4 Fail_Initialization Error is found during device initialization process.
5 Fail_FPGA FPGA chip in the MON module is damaged.
6 Fail_Overflow_AD Receiving buffer overflow is found during AD sampling.
7
9 2
Fail_SampleSyn_AD
1 9 2
Receiving buffer error is found during AD sampling.
9 2
71 71
8 Alm_Self-Check Error is found in device setting or the device is abnormal.
17
Alarm Signals (Device is not blocked, “HEALTHY” LED is lit on and “ALARM” LED is lit on)
1
2
Alm_Device
Alm_TimeSyn
1
The device is abnormal.
Time synchronization abnormality alarm. 1
This signal will pick up with a time delay of 60s and will drop off
instantaneously.
3 Alm_SamplSyn_FO Synchronization error exists in the receiving buffer of NET-DSP module.
4 Alm_Overflow_FO Received frames are beyond the capability of NET-DSP module.
5 Alm_SmplCRC_FO Error is found in the CRC code received by NET-DSP module.
6 Alm_SmplCounter_FO The frame counter of NET-DSP module is not consecutive.
Date: 2018-11-22
4 Supervision
No. Item Description

7 Alm_RecvTimeout_FO The data reception of NET-DSP module is time-out.
8 Alm_Quality_FO The data quality bit received by NET-DSP is "Invalid".
The [XXXX.UN_Pri] value (indicating residual voltage) is greater than
[XXXX.UN_Alm_ROV]*[XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt].
9 XXXX.Alm_ROV
2 2 2
This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and will drop off with a time
9 9 9
delay of 1s
71 71 71
VT circuit fails.
1 1 1
10 XXXX.Alm_VTS_Measmt This signal will pick up with a time delay of 1.25s and will drop off with a
time delay of 10s.
A primary phase voltage value is less than
[XXXX.U_Alm_UV]*[XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt].
11 XXXX.Alm_UV
This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and will drop off with a time
delay of 1s.
CT circuit fails.
12 XXXX.Alm_CTS This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and will drop off with a time
delay of 10s.
13 B**.Alm_Output Hardware error is found in the BO module at slot XX.
For a double position synthesis signal, which indicates CB/DS/ES status,
1 9 2 9 2 9 2
both the normally open (abbreviated as NO) contact and the normally
71 71
closed (abbreviated as NC) contact are opened or closed.
17
14 DPOS.Alm
This signal will pick up with a time delay of
1 1
“[DPOS.t_DPU_**]+[DPOS.t_Alm]” and will drop off with a time delay of
[DPOS.t_Alm].
An incompatibility of the settings [25.Opt_Side_Measmt] and
15 Alm_Settings_RSYN [25.Opt_Side_Syn] is found. This signal will pick up and drop off
immediately.
Table 4.1-2 Troubleshooting for BCU supervision alarm
No. Item Troubleshooting suggestion

Failure Signals (Device is blocked, “HEALTHY” LED is lit off, “ALARM” LED is lit on)
1 Fail_Device Eliminate all the other alarms firstly.
2 2 2
1. Put the device out of service.
1 9
Fail_Sample_AD
2.
71 9 71 9
Check the analog input module and the corresponding wiring
17
connector.
1 1
3. Reboot the device.
3 Fail_Settings Inform the local technical support or the manufacturer.
Check whether the software version in LCD display is consistent with the
4 Fail_Initialization
one in configuration file.
5 Fail_FPGA Inform the local technical support or the manufacturer for replacement.
1. Put the device out of service.
6 Fail_Overflow_AD
2. Check the analog input module and the corresponding wiring
connector.
7 Fail_SampleSyn_AD
3. Reboot the device.
Date: 2018-11-22
4 Supervision
No. Item Troubleshooting suggestion

1. Check whether the software version in LCD display is consistent with
8 Alm_Self-Check the one in the configuration file.
2. Check whether there is a fatal error in this device.
Alarm Signals (Device is not blocked, “HEALTHY” LED is lit on and “ALARM” LED is lit on)
2 2 2
1 Alm_Device Eliminate the other alarms firstly.
9 9 9
1. Check clock synchronization mode and the clock synchronization
71 71 71
source.
1 1 1
2 Alm_TimeSyn 2. Check wiring connection between the device and the source.
3. Check the setting [Opt_TimeSyn]. If there is no clock synchronization,
please set the setting to ”No TimeSyn”.
Check the communication channel and the compatibility between the
3 Alm_SamplSyn_FO
device program version and the configuration file.
4 Alm_Overflow_FO
5 Alm_SmplCRC_FO
Check the communication channel and the transmission speed.
6 Alm_SmplCounter_FO
7 Alm_RecvTimeout_FO
Check the MU sending configuration and the compatibility between the
8 Alm_Quality_FO
device program version and the configuration file.
9
9 2
XXXX.Alm_ROV
9 2 9 2
Check the residual voltage input or the calculated residual voltage.
71 71 71
10 XXXX.Alm_VTS_Measmt Check the measurement VT secondary circuit.
11 XXXX.Alm_UV Check three-phase voltages.
12
13 1
XXXX.Alm_CTS
B**.Alm_Output 1 1
Please check the corresponding CT secondary circuit.
Check the corresponding BO module or PLC module at the slot XX.
Check the double point signals listed in the submenu “MainMenu” ->
“Status” -> “Inputs” -> “DPS Inputs”).
[DPOS**]=“DPS_INT”: Intermediate-state;
[DPOS**]=“DPS_OFF”: Open;
14 DPOS.Alm
[DPOS**]=“DPS_ON”: Close;
[DPOS**]=“DPS_BAD”: Bad state.
If [DPOS**]=“DPS_INT” or “DPS_BAD”, check the state of corresponding
CB/DS/ES.
15
9 2
Alm_Settings_RSYN
1 9 2 9 2
Change the values of [25.Opt_Side_Measmt] and [25.Opt_Side_Syn]
71 71
(should be different) and save the modification.
17
4.2 GOOSE Alarm
1 1
If any GOOSE alarm signal is issued, the “ALARM” LED and the "HEALTHY” LED are both lit on. The
device is not blocked. When the GOOSE alarm signal disappears, the device will return to normal
state, and the “ALARM” LED will be lit off automatically.
NOTICE!
"YYYY" refers to a link identification name that can be configured through the
corresponding label setting (Access path: “MainMenu” -> “Settings” -> “Device Setup” ->
Date: 2018-11-22
4 Supervision
“Label Settings”).
"**" is a communication link sequence number.
Table 4.2-1 GOOSE alarm

1 GAlm_AStorm_SL
1 9 2 2
Network storm exists in station level GOOSE network A.
9 9 2
71 71
2 GAlm_BStorm_SL Network storm exists in station level GOOSE network B.
17
3 GAlm_CfgFile_SL Error exists in station level GOOSE configuration file.
4
5
6
YYYY.GAlm_ADisc_SL_**
YYYY.GAlm_BDisc_SL_**
YYYY.GAlm_Cfg_SL_**
1 1
Station level GOOSE network A link** is disconnected.
Station level GOOSE network B link** is disconnected.
Mismatch is found between the GOOSE control blocks received via network
and that defined in GOOSE configuration file in station level GOOSE network.
Table 4.2-2 Troubleshooting for GOOSE alarm
No. Item Handling suggestion

1 GAlm_AStorm_SL
2 GAlm_BStorm_SL
3 GAlm_CfgFile_SL Check Ethernet switches, ports, connections and GOOSE configuration file
2 2 2
4 YYYY.GAlm_ADisc_SL_** of station level GOOSE network.
5
6
71 9
YYYY.GAlm_BDisc_SL_**
YYYY.GAlm_Cfg_SL_**
71 9 71 9
1 1 1
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
Date: 2018-11-22
5 Management
5 Management
Table of Contents
9 2 9 2
5 Management .................................................................................... 5-a
9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
5.1 Measurements.................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Event Recording .............................................................................................. 5-1
5.2.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Device Supervision Events .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2.3 Binary Status Change Events .............................................................................................. 5-1
5.2.4 Device Logs .......................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.5 Switch Control Logs ............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2.6 DC Regulation Logs ............................................................................................................. 5-1
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
Date: 2018-11-22
5 Management
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
Date: 2018-11-22
5 Management
5.1 Measurements
This device performs continuous measurement of analog inputs. The device samples multiple
points per cycle (80 points for conventional CT/VT, 48 points for electronic/optic CT/VT), calculates
RMS values in each interval, and updates the LCD display in every 0.5s. The measurement can
be displayed on the LCD of the device HMI panel and transmitted to local/remote control centre.
9 2 9 2 9 2
71 71 71
The menu "Measurements3" is used to display the BCU sampled and calculated values.
1 1 1
5.2 Event Recording
5.2.1 Overview
The device can store the latest 1024 supervision events, 1024 IO events, 1024 device logs, 256
control logs and 256 regulation logs. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when
the available space is exhausted, the latest one will automatically overwrite the oldest record.
5.2.2 Device Supervision Events

Access path: "MainMenu"-> "Records"->"Superv Events".
The device is under automatic supervision all the time. If there is any failure or abnormal condition
2 2
detected (e.g. VT circuit failure), it will be stored and displayed.
9 9 9 2
71 71 71
5.2.3 Binary Status Change Events
1 1
Access path: "MainMenu"-> "Records"->"IO Events".
1
When a binary input is energized or de-energized, i.e., its state has changed from "0" to "1" or from
"1" to "0", it will be stored and displayed.
5.2.4 Device Logs

Access path: "MainMenu"-> "Records"->"Device Logs".
If an operator implements some operations on the device, such as reboot device, modify setting,
etc., they will be stored and displayed.
5.2.5 Switch Control Logs
9 2 9 2
Access path: "MainMenu"-> "Records"->"Control Logs".
9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
The total sequence of each attempt of control command will be stored and displayed, including
object, source, remote/local mode, interlock condition, command (selection/execution, open/close,
up/down) and result.
5.2.6 DC Regulation Logs

Access path: "MainMenu"-> "Records"->"Regulation Logs".
The total sequence of each attempt of regulation command will be stored and displayed, including
object, source, remote/local mode, command (selection/execution), value and result.
Date: 2018-11-22
5 Management
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
9 2 9 2 9 2
1 71 171 171
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
6 Hardware
Table of Contents
9 2 9 2
6 Hardware.......................................................................................... 6-a
9 2
1 71 1 71
6.2 Module Configuration (for EXAMPLE only) ................................................... 6-2
1 71
6.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 6-1
6.3 Typical Wiring (for EXAMPLE only) ................................................................ 6-4

6.3.1 Conventional CT/VT ............................................................................................................. 6-5
6.3.2 Electronic/Optic CT/VT ......................................................................................................... 6-6
6.4 HMI Module ...................................................................................................... 6-7

6.5 MON Module (Management & Monitoring) .................................................... 6-8
6.6 AC AI Module (AC Analog Input) ................................................................... 6-11
9 2 9 2 9 2
6.6.1 4CT/5VT ............................................................................................................................. 6-12
1 71 1 71 1 71
6.6.2 13VT ................................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.6.3 7CT/8VT ............................................................................................................................. 6-15
6.6.4 12CT ................................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.6.5 CT Requirement ................................................................................................................. 6-18
6.7 BI Module (Binary Input) ............................................................................... 6-19

6.7.1 NR4501 .............................................................................................................................. 6-20
6.7.2 NR4504 .............................................................................................................................. 6-26
6.8 DC AO Module (DC Analog Output) ............................................................. 6-28
9 2 9 2
6.9 DC AI Module (DC Analog Input) .................................................................. 6-29
9 2
1 71 1 71 1 71
6.9.1 NR4410 .............................................................................................................................. 6-29
6.9.2 NR4418 .............................................................................................................................. 6-31
6.10 BO Module (Binary Output) ........................................................................ 6-33

6.11 PLC Module (Binary Output for Interlocking Logic) ................................. 6-36
6.12 PWR Module (Device Power Supply) ......................................................... 6-36
6.13 NET-DSP Module (SV & GOOSE Message) ................................................ 6-41
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
List of Figures
Figure 6.1-1 Hardware diagram.................................................................................................. 6-1
Figure 6.2-1 Terminal view example (4U 19" rack, App 1, 2, 3) .............................................. 6-2
Figure 6.2-2 Module configuration example (4U 19" rack, App 1, 2, 3) ................................. 6-3
17192 17192 17192

Figure 6.2-3 Terminal view example (4U 19" rack, App 4, 5) .................................................. 6-3
Figure 6.2-4 Module configuration example (4U 19" rack, App 4, 5) ..................................... 6-3
Figure 6.2-5 Terminal view example (4U 9.5" rack, App 1, 2, 3) ............................................. 6-4
Figure 6.2-6 Module configuration example (4U 9.5" rack, App 1, 2, 3) ................................ 6-4
Figure 6.3-1 Typical wiring diagram (Conventional CT/VT) .................................................... 6-5
Figure 6.3-2 Typical wiring diagram (ECT/EVT) ....................................................................... 6-6
Figure 6.4-1 HMI view (4U 19" rack) .......................................................................................... 6-7
Figure 6.4-2 HMI view (4U 19" rack with Control Buttons & Switches) ................................. 6-7
Figure 6.4-3 HMI view (4U 9.5" rack) ......................................................................................... 6-8
17192 17192 17192

Figure 6.5-1 MON module ........................................................................................................... 6-9
Figure 6.5-2 Serial port connection in MON module ..............................................................6-11
Figure 6.6-1 AC AI module 4CT/5VT ........................................................................................ 6-12
Figure 6.6-2 AC AI module 13VT .............................................................................................. 6-13
Figure 6.6-3 AC AI module 7CT/8VT ........................................................................................ 6-15
Figure 6.6-4 AC AI module 12CT .............................................................................................. 6-17
Figure 6.7-1 BI module NR4501 ............................................................................................... 6-20
Figure 6.7-2 BI module NR4504 ............................................................................................... 6-27
Figure 6.8-1 DC AO module ...................................................................................................... 6-28
17192 17192 17192

Figure 6.9-1 DC AI module (NR4410) ....................................................................................... 6-30
Figure 6.9-2 DC AI module (NR4418) ....................................................................................... 6-32
Figure 6.10-1 BO module .......................................................................................................... 6-34
Figure 6.11-1 PLC module ........................................................................................................ 6-36
Figure 6.12-1 PWR module ....................................................................................................... 6-37
Figure 6.13-1 NET-DSP module ................................................................................................ 6-42
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
List of Tables
Table 6.1-1 Module brief.............................................................................................................. 6-2
Table 6.5-1 Subtypes of MON module ....................................................................................... 6-9
Table 6.5-2 Jumpers for IRIG-B signal reception mode .........................................................6-11
17192 17192 17192

Table 6.6-1 Pin description of AC AI module 4CT/5VT .......................................................... 6-12
Table 6.6-2 Pin description of AC AI module 13VT ................................................................ 6-14
Table 6.6-3 Voltage input for App2 & App4 using NR4402 13VT .......................................... 6-14
Table 6.6-4 Residual voltage input for App2 using NR4402 13VT ........................................ 6-15
Table 6.6-5 Pin description of AC AI module 7CT/8VT .......................................................... 6-16
Table 6.6-6 Pin description of AC AI module 12CT ................................................................ 6-17
Table 6.7-1 Pin description of the NR4501 (except the obligatory one) .............................. 6-20
Table 6.7-2 Pin description of the obligatory NR4501 in PCS-9705 (Single bay) ............... 6-21
Table 6.7-3 Pin description of the obligatory NR4501 in PCS-9705 (General/Extended
17192 17192 17192

General) ...................................................................................................................................... 6-22
Table 6.7-4 Pin description of the obligatory NR4501 in PCS-9705 (Dual bays) ................ 6-23
Table 6.7-5 Pin description of the obligatory NR4501 in PCS-9705 (Transformer) ............ 6-24
Table 6.7-6 Pin description of BI module NR4504.................................................................. 6-27
Table 6.8-1 Pin description of DC AO module ........................................................................ 6-28
Table 6.9-1 Specifications of the DC AI module (NR4410) .................................................... 6-29
Table 6.9-2 Jumper configuration in the DC AI module (NR4410C/D) ................................. 6-30
Table 6.9-3 Pin description of the DC AI module (NR4410) .................................................. 6-30
Table 6.9-4 Specifications of the DC AI module (NR4418) .................................................... 6-31
17192 17192 17192

Table 6.9-5 Jumper configuration in the DC AI module (NR4418D) ..................................... 6-32
Table 6.9-6 Pin description of the DC AI module (NR4418D) ................................................ 6-32
Table 6.10-1 Pin description of BO module ............................................................................ 6-34
Table 6.10-2 Matchup of duplicated binary output ................................................................ 6-35
Table 6.10-3 Binary output for the control of tap changer .................................................... 6-35
Table 6.12-1 Pin description of PWR module (App1) ............................................................ 6-37
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
6.1 Overview
PCS-9705 adopts 32-bit microchip processor as the control core for management and monitoring
function, meanwhile, adopts high-speed digital signal processor DSP for calculation. 80 points are
sampled in every cycle and parallel processing of sampled data can be realized in each sampling
interval to ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety of the device.
17192 17192 17192

This device is developed on the basis of NR's latest software and hardware platform, and this new
platform provides high reliability, networking and great capability for anti-interference.
Output Relay
Binary Input
External
Conventional CT/VT A/D
FPGA
A/D Pickup
Relay
17192 17192 17192

LCD ETHERNET +E
DSP
Power
Uaux LED Clock SYN
Supply
Keypad ARM RJ45
Figure 6.1-1 Hardware diagram
The working process of the device is shown in above figure: current and voltage from conventional
CT/VT are converted into small voltage signal and sent to the FPGA in MON module after filtered
and A/D conversion for calculation.
This device is comprised of several modules as shown below.
17192 17192 17192

 MON module provides management and monitoring functions, such as SAS Communication,
event recording, setting modification, etc. Station level GOOSE message can also be
received by MON module.
 NET-DSP module can receive SV data from merging unit via IEC61850-9-2. This module can
also receive process level GOOSE message.
 AC AI module converts AC current and voltage from CT/VT to small voltage signal.
 BI module provides binary inputs via opto-couplers with rated voltage.
 DC AI module can receive DC analog inputs from transducer representing temperature,

humidity, etc.
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
 DC AO module sends DC analog output to regulate certain object such as generator power.
 BO module provides output contacts assigned for protection tripping, remote control and
signalization.
 PLC module provides output contacts for interlocking logic signal.
 PWR module converts 110~250Vdc into various low level DC voltage for modules and
17192 17192 17192

electronic components.
Table 6.1-1 Module brief
Module Type Symbol Brief

NR4106 MON Management and monitoring
NR4138 NET-DSP Transmission of GOOSE & SV data with merging unit via IEC61850-9-2
NR4402 AC AI AC analog input
NR4501/NR4504 BI Binary input
NR4410/NR4418 DC AI DC analog input (from transducer)
NR4411 DC AO DC analog output
NR4522 BO Binary output for tripping and signalization
NR4522 PLC Binary output for interlocking logic
17192 17192 17192

NR4304 PWR Device power supply
6.2 Module Configuration (for EXAMPLE only)

NOTICE!
This section shows several examples of device terminal view and module arrangement.
The following figures should NOT be used as reference for device configuration or
wiring design. For such purpose, please use the latest corresponding Manufacture
Ordering Table and consult our design department.
Slot 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
TX
01 02
1
RX 2
17192 17192 17192

01 02 3
TX
4
RX
03 04
5
05 06
6
7
07 08 8
9
09 10
10
11 12 11
12
13 14 13
14
15
15 16
17 18
16
17
19 20 18
19
21 22
20 PWR+
21 22
21 PWR-
22 GND
24
Figure 6.2-1 Terminal view example (4U 19" rack, App 1, 2, 3)
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
NET-DSP module
DC AI module
AC AI module
PWR module
MON module
PLC module
PLC module
PLC module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
17192 17192 17192
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 6.2-2 Module configuration example (4U 19" rack, App 1, 2, 3)
Slot 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
01 02
1
2
01 02
01 02 01 02 3
4
03 04 03 04
5
05 06 05 06
6
7
07 08 07 08 8
9
09 10 09 10
10
11 12 11 12 11
12
13 14 13 14 13
14
15
15 16 15 16
17 18 17 18
16
17
19 20 19 20 18
19
21 22 21 22
20 PWR+
21 PWR-
17192 17192 17192

21 22 21 22
22 GND
24 24
Figure 6.2-3 Terminal view example (4U 19" rack, App 4, 5)

DC AI module
DC AI module
AC AI module
AC AI module
PWR module
MON module
PLC module
PLC module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
17192 17192 17192

Figure 6.2-4 Module configuration example (4U 19" rack, App 4, 5)
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
Slot 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
TX
01 02
1
RX 2
01 02 3
TX
4
RX
03 04
5
05 06
6
7
07 08 8
17192 17192 17192

9
09 10
10
11 12 11
12
13 14 13
14
15
15 16
17 18
16
17
19 20 18
19
21 22
20 PWR+
21 22
21 PWR-
22 GND
24
Figure 6.2-5 Terminal view example (4U 9.5" rack, App 1, 2, 3)

NET-DSP module
17192 17192 17192

AC AI module
PWR module
MON module
BO module
BO module
BI module
BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
Figure 6.2-6 Module configuration example (4U 9.5" rack, App 1, 2, 3)
6.3 Typical Wiring (for EXAMPLE only)

NOTICE!
This section shows several examples of device typical wiring diagram.
The following figures should NOT be used as reference for device configuration or
17192 17192 17192

wiring design. For such purpose, please use the latest corresponding Manufacture
Ordering Table and consult our design department.
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
6.3.1 Conventional CT/VT
NR4501 BI module
1001
0501 Opto+
For NR4504 BI module: common negative terminal, 2 inputs per

DO_I1
DC analog output (optional)

1002
1003
0502 + BI_01 DO_U1 1004
…
1019
…
17192 17192 17192
DO_I4 1020
0521 + BI_20
1021
0522 DO_U4 1022
group
0901 Opto+ … 1101
DI1 1102
DC analog input (optional)

0902 + BI_81 1104
DI2 1105
…
…
1119
BI_100 DI7 1120
0921 +
1121
0922 DI8
1122
0301
0302 Ia
0303 1201/1501
0304 Ib BO_CtrlOpn01 1202/1502
0305
…
0306 Ic 1411
BO_CtrlCls13
Binary output (optional)
0307 1412
0308 3I0
17192 17192 17192

1413
BO_StepDownTP 1414
0313
Ua 1415
0314 BO_StepUpTP 1416
0315
Reference side
0316 Ub 1415
BO_EmergStopTP
voltage
0317 1416
0318 Uc 1419
BO_Resv 1420
0319
0320 3U0 1421
BO_Ctrl3 1422
Incoming side
voltage
0321
1701
0322 Usyn
BO_01 1702
…
1721
2020 BO_11
Binary outputs for interlock logic
PWR+ 1722
External DC power Power
supply 2021 Supply 1801
PWR-
BO_12 1802
2002 BO_FAIL
(optional)
2003 BO_ALM 1821

2001 COM BO_22 1822
17192 17192 17192

A 0101 1901
cable with single point earthing
BO_23
To the screen of other coaxial
B 0102 1902
COM
SGND 0103
…
1921
0104 BO_33 1922
SYN+ 0101
Clock SYN
SYN- 0102
SGND 0103
Multiplex 2022
0104 RJ45 (Front)
0327
Grounding
Bus
Figure 6.3-1 Typical wiring diagram (Conventional CT/VT)
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
6.3.2 Electronic/Optic CT/VT
1001
NR4501 BI module DO_I1 1002
DC analog output (optional)

For NR4504 BI module: common negative terminal, 2 inputs per group
0501 Opto+ 1003
DO_U1 1004
…
17192 17192 17192
0502 + BI_01 1019
DO_I4 1020
1021
…
DO_U4 1022
0521 + BI_20
0522
1101
…
DI1 1102
DC analog input (optional)

0901 Opto+
1104
DI2 1105
…
0902 + BI_01
1119
DI7 1120
…
1121
0921 + BI_20 DI8
1122
0922
1201/1501
BO_CtrlOpn01 1202/1502
…
1411
Phase A RX BO_CtrlCls13
FO interface for SV channel
1412
Binary output (optional)
17192 17192 17192

SV from
ECT/EVT
1413
MU
Phase B
BO_StepDownTP
(LC Type)
1414
Up to 6
Phase C TX
1415
BO_StepUpTP
…
1416
1415
BO_EmergStopTP
1416
1419
BO_Resv 1420
1421
BO_Ctrl3 1422
PWR+ 2020
External DC power Power
supply 2021 Supply
PWR- 1701
2002 BO_01 1702
BO_FAIL
2003
…
BO_ALM
Binary outputs for interlock logic (optional)
1721
2001 COM BO_11 1722
1801
BO_12 1802
…
1821
A 0101
17192 17192 17192

BO_22 1822
B 0102
COM
SGND 0103 1901

BO_23 1902
0104
…
SYN+ 0101 1921

Clock SYN
BO_33 1922
SYN- 0102
SGND 0103
0104 IRIG-B
Multiplex 2022
RJ45 (Front)
0327
Grounding
Bus
Figure 6.3-2 Typical wiring diagram (ECT/EVT)
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
If electronic current and voltage transformer (ECT/EVT) are adopted, the merging unit will merge
the sample data from ECT/EVT, and then send it to the device through multi-mode optical fiber.
NET-DSP module receives the data from merging unit through the optical-fiber interface.
The difference between the hardware platform based on ECT/EVT and the hardware platform
based on conventional CT/VT lies in the receiving module of sampled values only, and the device
receives the sampled value from merging unit through multi-mode optical fiber.
17192 17192 17192

6.4 HMI Module
The HMI module consists of liquid crystal display module, keypad, LED, RJ-45 debugging port and
ARM processor. The functions of ARM processor include display control of LCD, key operation
processing, and data exchange with the MON module through inner bus.
1
HEALTHY
11 PCS-9705
2
ALARM
12
BAY CONTROL UNIT
3 13
4 14
C FUN
5 15
6 16
ENT
7 17
ES
8 18
9 19
17192 17192 17192

10 20
Figure 6.4-1 HMI view (4U 19" rack)
1 11
HEALTHY PCS-9705
BAY CONTROL UNIT
2 12
ALARM
3 13
4 14
I
FUN
5 15
6 16 ENT
ESC
7 17
8 18
9 19
E LO
OT C CK LO
M LO
17192 17192 17192

RE
CK
AL
UN
10 20
Figure 6.4-2 HMI view (4U 19" rack with Control Buttons & Switches)
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
PCS-9705
1 11
HEALTHY
2 12
ALARM
3 13
4 14
5 15
6 16
7 17
8 18
17192 17192 17192

9 19
10 20
FUN
ENT
ESC
Figure 6.4-3 HMI view (4U 9.5" rack)
6.5 MON Module (Management & Monitoring)

The MON module is obligatory and fixed at the slot 01 in this device. It consists of
high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM, Ethernet controller and other
peripherals. Its functions include management of the complete device, communication with HMI
module, communication with SAS, etc.
17192 17192 17192

MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
comprises several Ethernet ports, RS-485 Communication ports and clock synchronization port.
CAUTION!
Do NOT look into the end of an optical fiber connected to an optical port.
Do NOT look into an optical port/connector.
A direct sight to laser light may cause temporary or permanent blindness.
Modules with various ports and memory capacities are available as shown below.
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
NR4106MA NR4106MB NR4106MC NR4106MD
TX TX
RX RX
TX TX
17192 17192 17192 RX RX
17192 17192 17192 Figure 6.5-1 MON module
Table 6.5-1 Subtypes of MON module
Subtype Port Pin No. Usage Physical Layer

3 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Network wire
01
02 A
RS-485 Reserved
03 B
04 SGND
05 FGND
06 A
17192 17192 17192

RS-485 Reserved
07 B Twisted-pair wire
NR4106MA 08 SGND
09 FGND
10 SYN+
11 SYN-
RS-485 To clock synchronization
12 SGND
13 FGND
14 RTS
RS-232 15 TXD Reserved Cable
16 SGND
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
Subtype Port Pin No. Usage Physical Layer

01 SYN+
02 SYN-
RS-485 To clock synchronization Twisted-pair wire
03 SGND
NR4106MB
04 FGND
17192 17192 17192

05 RTS
07 SGND
2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fiber ST
01
02 A
RS-485 Reserved
03 B
04 SGND
05 FGND
06 A
RS-485 Reserved
07 B Twisted-pair wire
NR4106MC 08 SGND
09 FGND
17192 17192 17192

10 SYN+
11 SYN-
RS-485 To clock synchronization
12 SGND
13 FGND
14 RTS
16 SGND
2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fiber ST
01 SYN+
02 SYN-
RS-485 To clock synchronization Twisted-pair wire
NR4106MD 03 SGND
04 FGND
17192 17192 17192

05 RTS
07 SGND
The correct connection is shown in the following figure. Generally, the shielded cable with two
pairs of twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs are respectively used to
connect the "+" and "–" terminals of difference signal. The other pair of twisted pairs is used to
connect the signal ground of the Communication interface. The module reserves a free terminal
for all the communication ports. The free terminal has no connection with any signal of the device,
and it is used to connect the external shields of the cable when connecting multiple devices in
series. The external shield of the cable shall be grounded at one of the ends only.
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
NOTICE!
The NR4106MD is ONLY valid for App1, 2, 3 full-width rack.
Twisted-pair wire
A 01
B 02
COM
17192 17192 17192
SGND 03
FGND 04
Twisted-pair wire
SYN+ 01
Clock SYN
SYN- 02
SGND 03
FGND 04
Cable
RTS 01
Reserved
TXD 02
SGND 03
17192 17192 17192

Figure 6.5-2 Serial port connection in MON module
NOTICE!
For the IRIG-B time synchronization signal, its reception mode could be set by the
following 2 jumpers in the MON module.
Table 6.5-2 Jumpers for IRIG-B signal reception mode
Jumper TTL RS-485
J10
J11
6.6 AC AI Module (AC Analog Input)
17192 17192 17192

AC AI module is applicable for conventional CT/VT. However, this module is not necessary if the
device is used with electronic CT/VT.
NOTICE!
The rated value of the input current transformer is optional: 1A or 5A. Please declare
the rated value of the CT when placing order. It is necessary to check whether the rated
values of the current transformer inputs are in accordance with the demand of practical
engineering before putting the device into operation.
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
NOTICE!
The width of AC AI module is doubled. One AC AI module occupies 2 slots.
6.6.1 4CT/5VT
Ia 01 Ian 02
NR4402
17192 17192 17192

Ib 03 Ibn 04
Ic 05 Icn 06
IN 07 INn 08
09 10
11 12
Ua 13 Uan 14
Ub 15 Ubn 16
Uc 17 Ucn 18
UN 19 UNn 20
17192 17192 17192

Usyn 21 Un_syn 22
23 24
25 26
Figure 6.6-1 AC AI module 4CT/5VT
Table 6.6-1 Pin description of AC AI module 4CT/5VT
Pin No. Sign Description
01 Ia
Current input of phase A.
02 Ian
03 Ib
Current input of phase B.
17192 17192 17192

04 Ibn
05 Ic
Current input of phase C.
06 Icn
07 IN
Residual current input.
08 INn
09 Not used.
10 Not used.
11 Not used.
12 Not used.
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
13 Ua
14 Uan
15 Ub Voltage inputs of reference side for synchronism-check when closing CB, phase sequence
16 Ubn is (A, B, C), star connection (Y).
17192 17192 17192

17 Uc
18 Ucn
19 UN
Residual voltage input.
20 UNn
21 Usyn
Voltage input of incoming side for synchronism-check when closing CB.
22 Un_syn
23 Not used.
24 Not used.
25 Not used.
26 Not used.
6.6.2 13VT
17192 17192 17192 NR4402

U1
U2
01
03
Un1
Un2
02
04
U3 05 Un3 06
U4 07 Un4 08
U5 09 Un5 10
U6 11 Un6 12
U7 13 Un7 14
U8 15 Un8 16
U9 17 Un9 18
17192 17192 17192 U10
U11
19
21
Un10
Un11
20
22
U12 23 Un12 24
U13 25 Un13 26
Figure 6.6-2 AC AI module 13VT
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
Table 6.6-2 Pin description of AC AI module 13VT
01 U1
Voltage input of phase A.
02 Un1
03 U2
Group 1 Voltage input of phase B.
17192 17192 17192

04 Un2
05 U3
Voltage input of phase C.
06 Un3
07 U4
08 Un4
09 U5
10 Un5
11 U6
12 Un6
13 U7
14 Un7
17192 17192 17192

15 U8
16 Un8
17 U9
18 Un9
19 U10
Voltage input of phase A or Residual voltage input for the group 1
20 Un10
21 U11
Group 4 Voltage input of phase B or Residual voltage input for the group 2
22 Un11
23 U12
Voltage input of phase C or Residual voltage input for the group 3
24 Un12
25 U13
Residual voltage input for the group 4
17192 17192 17192

26 Un13
NOTICE!
The App 2 (General) the App4 (Extended General) will use this subtype AC AI module
in different ways.
Table 6.6-3 Voltage input for App2 & App4 using NR4402 13VT
Application App 2 (General) App 4 (Extended General)

Slot No. Slot 03 & 04 Slot 03 & 04 Slot 05 & 06
Pin No. Pin 01~26 Pin 01~24 Pin 03~26
Signification Voltage input 01~13 Voltage input 01~12 Voltage input 13~24
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
NOTICE!
The setting [Vol3P.Opt_UN] in the submenu "Settings" -> "BCU Settings" -> "FUN
Settings" is used to decide the input mode of residual voltage. Its value will influence
the number of voltage inputs especially for the App2 using NR4402 13VT.
Table 6.6-4 Residual voltage input for App2 using NR4402 13VT
17192 17192 17192

NR4402-13VT for Terminals
Remark
App2 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26
Residual voltage is
calculated by the
[Vol3P.Opt_UN]=1 The 4th group three-phases voltages invalid
corresponding
three-phase voltages.
The residual The residual The residual The residual
Residual voltage is
[Vol3P.Opt_UN]=0 voltage of the voltage of the voltage of the voltage of the
sampled by specific VT.
1st group 2nd group 3rd group 4th group
6.6.3 7CT/8VT
Ia1 01 Ia1n 02
NR4402
17192 17192 17192

Ib1 03 Ib1n 04
Ic1 05 Ic1n 06
Ia2 07 Ia2n 08
Ib2 09 Ib2n 10
Ic2 11 Ic2n 12
Iext 13 Iextn 14
Ua1 15 Ub1 16
Uc1 17 Un1 18
Usyn1 19 Un_syn1 20
17192 17192 17192

Ua2 21 Ub2 22
Uc2 23 Un2 24
Usyn2 25 Un_syn2 26
Figure 6.6-3 AC AI module 7CT/8VT
NOTICE!
In 1½ CB arrangement, there are 2 circuit breakers related to this device: Side CB and
Center CB.
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
Table 6.6-5 Pin description of AC AI module 7CT/8VT
01 Ia1
02 Ia1n
03 Ib1
Group 1 Current input of phase B.
17192 17192 17192

04 Ib1n
05 Ic1
06 Ic1n
07 Ia2
08 Ia2n
09 Ib2
10 Ib2n
11 Ic2
12 Ic2n
Terminal "13" and "14" on the AI module of PCS-9705 (Dual bays) are used
to receive independent external current input.
13 Iext The primary value of the independent external current is displayed as
17192 17192 17192 "Sum_MMXU.Iext_Pri" in the submenu

"Measurements"->"Measurements3"->"Primary Values" of PCS-9705
(Dual bays).
The secondary value of the independent external current is displayed as
14 Iextn "Sum_MMXU.Iext_Sec" in the submenu
"Measurements"->"Measurements3"->"Secondary Values" of PCS-9705
(Dual bays).
15 Ua1
16 Ub1 Voltage inputs of reference side for synchronism-check when closing the 1st
17 Uc1 CB, phase sequence is (A, B, C), star connection (Y).
Group 1
18 Un1
19 Usyn1 Voltage input of incoming side for synchronism-check when closing the 1st
17192 17192 17192

20 Un_syn1 CB.
21 Ua2
22 Ub2 Voltage inputs of reference side for synchronism-check when closing the 2nd
23 Uc2 CB, phase sequence is (A, B, C), star connection (Y).
Group 2
24 Un2
25 Usyn2 Voltage input of incoming side for synchronism-check when closing the 2nd
26 Un_syn2 CB.
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
6.6.4 12CT
Ia1 01 Ia1' 02
NR4402
Ib1 03 Ib1' 04
Ic1 05 Ic1' 06
17192 17192 17192

Ia2 07 Ia2' 08
Ib2 09 Ib2' 10
Ic2 11 Ic2' 12
Ia3 13 Ia3' 14
Ib3 15 Ib3' 16
Ic3 17 Ic3' 18
I01/Ia4 19 I01'/Ia4' 20
I02/Ib4 21 I02'/Ib4' 22
I03/Ic4 23 I03'/Ic4' 24
17192 17192 17192

25 26
Figure 6.6-4 AC AI module 12CT
Table 6.6-6 Pin description of AC AI module 12CT
01 Ia1
02 Ia1'
03 Ib1
04 Ib1'
05 Ic1
06 Ic1'
17192 17192 17192

07
08
09
Ia2
Ia2'
Ib2
Group 2
Current input of phase B.

10 Ib2'
11 Ic2
12 Ic2'
13 Ia3
14 Ia3' Group 3
15 Ib3 Current input of phase B.
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
16 Ib3'
17 Ic3
18 Ic3'
19 I01/Ia4
Residual 1 or phase A current input.
17192 17192 17192

20 I01'/Ia4'
21 I02/Ib4
Group 4 Residual 2 or phase B current input.
22 I02'/Ib4'
23 I03/Ic4
Residual 3 or phase C current input.
24 I03'/Ic4'
25 Not used.
26 Not used.
6.6.5 CT Requirement
 Rated primary current Ipn
According to the rated current or maximum load current of primary apparatus.
17192 17192 17192

 Rated continuous thermal current Icth
According to the maximum load current.
 Rated short-time thermal current Ith and rated dynamic current Idyn
According to the maximum fault current.
 Rated secondary current Isn
 Accuracy limit factor Kalf
Ipn Rated primary current (amps)

Icth Rated continuous thermal current (amps)
Ith Rated short-time thermal current (amps)
Idyn Rated dynamic current (amps)
Isn Rated secondary current (amps)

17192 17192 17192
Kalf
IPal
Accuracy limit factor ()Kalf=Ipal/Ipn
Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Performance verification
Esl > Esl′
Rated secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Esl
Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)
IPal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware

Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)
Rated resistance burden (ohms)
Rbn
Rbn=Sbn/Isn2
Sbn Rated burden (VAs)
17192 17192 17192

Required secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)
Esl′
Esl′ = k×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
k stability factor = 2
Protective checking factor current (amps)
Ipcf
Same as the maximum prospective fault current
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)
Real resistance burden (ohms)
Rb
Rb=Rr+2×RL+Rc
Rc Contact resistance, 0.05-0.1 ohm (ohms)
RL Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)
Rr Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)
17192 17192 17192

 For example:
 Kalf=30, Isn=5A, Rct=1ohm, Sbn=60VA
Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn) = kalf×Isn×(Rct+ Sbn/ Isn2) = 30×5×(1+60/25)=510V
 Ipcf=40000A, RL=0.5ohm, Rr=0.1ohm, Rc=0.1ohm, Ipn=2000A
Esl′ = 2×Ipcf×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn = 2×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+(Rr+2×RL+Rc))/Ipn
= 2×40000×5×(1+(0.1+2×0.5+0.1))/2000=440V
Thus, Esl > Esl′
6.7 BI Module (Binary Input)

Each binary input is processed by a well-designed debouncing technique to avoid any hazardous
17192 17192 17192

behavior (multiple state changes during a given duration). A separate debouncing and jitter time
may be set for each binary input.
NOTICE!
At least one BI module is obligatory in this device while the other BI modules are
optional.
NOTICE!
Several rated voltages of BI module are optional, please declare the option when
placing order. It is necessary to check whether the rated voltage of BI module meets the
demand of engineering before putting the device into operation.
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
6.7.1 NR4501
Each NR4501 BI module (except the obligatory one) has 21 optically isolated binary inputs and 1
common negative pin.
BI_01 01
NR4501 BI_02 02
17192 17192 17192

BI_03 03
BI_04 04
BI_05 05
BI_06 06
BI_07 07
BI_08 08
BI_09 09
BI_10 10
BI_11 11
BI_12 12
BI_13 13
BI_14 14
BI_15 15
BI_16 16
17192 17192 17192

BI_17 17
BI_18 18
BI_19 19
BI_20 20
BI_21 21
Opto- 22
Figure 6.7-1 BI module NR4501
 The following table shows the pin description of NR4501 (except the obligatory one).
Table 6.7-1 Pin description of the NR4501 (except the obligatory one)
01 BI_01
17192 17192 17192

02 BI_02
03 BI_03
04 BI_04
05 BI_05
Configurable
06 BI_06
07 BI_07
08 BI_08
09 BI_09
10 BI_10
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
11 BI_11
12 BI_12
13 BI_13
14 BI_14
17192 17192 17192

15 BI_15
16 BI_16
17 BI_17
18 BI_18
19 BI_19
20 BI_20
21 BI_21
22 Opto- Common negative pole for the binary inputs in this module
NOTICE!
If more than one BI module is equipped, the first one MUST be NR4501 and the others
can be NR4501 or NR4504.

17192 17192 17192
The arrangement of the 21 binary inputs in the obligatory NR4501 BI module is FIXED
as: 14 reserved, 6 configurable and 1 for power supply supervision.
The following table shows the default pin description of the obligatory NR4501 in PCS-9705
(Single bay).
Table 6.7-2 Pin description of the obligatory NR4501 in PCS-9705 (Single bay)
01 Configurable
Binary input indicating device maintenance status

02 BI_Maintenance 1: The device is in maintenance
0: The device is in service
Binary input to enable/disable the block function of interlocking logic
17192 17192 17192

03 CILO.BI_Disable 1: binary outputs will not be blocked by interlocking logic
0: binary outputs can be blocked by interlocking logic
Binary input to enable remote/local control mode

04 BI_Rmt/Loc 1: remote
0: local
Binary input to issue a CB closing command with synchronism check while

05 BI_Manual_Synchro
[BI_Rmt/Loc] = 0
06 BI_Manual_Open Binary input to issue a CB opening command while [BI_Rmt/Loc] = 0
07
Configurable
08
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
09
10
11
12
17192 17192 17192

13
14
15
16 BI_15(BCD1)
17 BI_16(BCD2) If [84.Code_Tap_Pos] is configured as "1", binary inputs 15 to 20 will be used

as Binary-Coded Decimal (abbreviated as BCD) codes for transformer tap
18 BI_17(BCD3)
position indication.
19 BI_18(BCD4)
(Access menu of [84.Code_Tap_Pos]:
20 BI_19(BCD5)
"MainMenu"->"Settings"->"BCU Settings" ->"TP Settings".)
21 BI_20(BCD6)
22 Opto-_1 Common negative pole for the binary inputs in this module
 The following table shows the pin description of the obligatory NR4501 in PCS-9705 (General
17192 17192 17192

/ Extended General).
Table 6.7-3 Pin description of the obligatory NR4501 in PCS-9705 (General/Extended General)
01 Configurable



17192 17192 17192

0: local
05
06
07
08
Configurable
09
10
11
12
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
13
14
15
16 BI_15(BCD1)
If [84.Code_Tap_Pos] is configured as "1", binary inputs 15 to 20 will be used
17192 17192 17192

17 BI_16(BCD2)
18 BI_17(BCD3)
19 BI_18(BCD4)
20 BI_19(BCD5)
21 BI_20(BCD6)
 The following table shows the pin description of the obligatory NR4501 in PCS-9705 (Dual
bays).
Table 6.7-4 Pin description of the obligatory NR4501 in PCS-9705 (Dual bays)
01 Configurable
17192 17192 17192

02 BI_Maintenance
1: The device is in maintenance


0: local
Binary input to issue a 1st CB closing command with synchronism check

05 BI_Manual_Synchro1
while [BI_Rmt/Loc] = 0
06 BI_Manual_Open1 Binary input to issue a 1st CB opening command while [BI_Rmt/Loc] = 0
17192 17192 17192

Binary input to issue a 2nd CB closing command with synchronism check
08 BI_Manual_Open2 Binary input to issue a 2nd CB opening command while [BI_Rmt/Loc] = 0
09
10
11
Configurable
12
13
14
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
15
16 BI_15(BCD1)

18 BI_17(BCD3)
17192 17192 17192

19 BI_18(BCD4)
20 BI_19(BCD5)
21 BI_20(BCD6)
 The following table shows the pin description of the obligatory NR4501 in PCS-9705
(Transformer).
Table 6.7-5 Pin description of the obligatory NR4501 in PCS-9705 (Transformer)
01 Configurable

17192 17192 17192



0: local
Binary input to issue a 1st CB closing command with synchronism check

05 BI_Manual_Synchro
06 BI_Manual_Open Binary input to issue a 1st CB opening command while [BI_Rmt/Loc] = 0
Binary input to issue a 2nd CB closing command with synchronism check

17192 17192 17192

08 BI_Manual_Open2 Binary input to issue a 2nd CB opening command while [BI_Rmt/Loc] = 0
Binary input to issue a 3rd CB closing command with synchronism check

10 BI_Manual_Open3 Binary input to issue a 3rd CB opening command while [BI_Rmt/Loc] = 0
Binary input to issue a 4th CB closing command with synchronism check

12 BI_Manual_Open4 Binary input to issue a 4th CB opening command while [BI_Rmt/Loc] = 0
13
Configurable
14
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
15
16 BI_15(BCD1)

18 BI_17(BCD3)
17192 17192 17192

19 BI_18(BCD4)
20 BI_19(BCD5)
21 BI_20(BCD6)
NOTICE!
If the HMI module with control buttons and switches is adopted, the binary inputs
"CILO.BI_Disable" and "BI_Rmt/Loc" on the obligatory NR4501 BI module will be
replaced respectively by the switches "UNLOCK/LOCK" and "REMOTE/LOCAL". Thus,
these 2 pins in the BI module will be invalid.
 [BI_Maintenance]
During device maintenance or testing, this binary input is energized to block the
17192 17192 17192

communication export via communication port. Meanwhile, local display still works. This
binary input should be de-energized when the device is restored back to normal service.
Especially, for digital substation communication adopting IEC 61850 protocol, the processing
will be different.
 Processing mechanism for MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) message
a) The protection device should send the state of this binary input to client.
b) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the sent message
changes to “1”.
c) When this binary input is energized, the client cannot control the isolator link and
circuit breaker, modify settings and switch setting group remotely.
d) According to the value of the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the message sent, the client
17192 17192 17192

discriminate whether this message is maintenance message, and then deals with it
correspondingly. If the message is the maintenance message, the content of the
message will not be displayed on real-time message window, audio alarm not issued,
but the picture is refreshed so as to ensure that the state of the picture is in step with
the actual state. The maintenance message will be stored, and can be inquired, in
independent window.
 Processing mechanism for GOOSE message
a) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” in the GOOSE message sent by
the protection device changes to “1”.
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
b) For the receiving end of GOOSE message, it will compare the value of the bit “Test”
in the GOOSE message received by it with the state of its own binary input (i..e
[BI_Maintenance]), the message will be thought as invalid unless they are
conformable.
 Processing mechanism for SV (Sampling Value) message
a) When this binary input of merging unit is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) of
17192 17192 17192

b)
sampling data in the SV message sent change “1”.
For the receiving end of SV message, if the value of bit “Test” of quality (Q) of
sampling data in the SV message received is “1”, the relevant protection functions
will be disabled, but under maintenance state, the protection device should calculate
and display the magnitude of sampling data.
c) For duplicated protection function configurations, all merging units of control module
configured to receive sampling should be also duplicated. Both dual protection
devices and dual merging units should be fully independent each other, and one of
them is in maintenance state will not affect the normal operation of the other.
6.7.2 NR4504
Each BI module NR4504 has 14 optically isolated binary inputs in 7 groups (each two shares one
17192 17192 17192

common negative pole).
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
BI_01 01
NR4504 BI_02 02
Opto-_1 03
BI_03 04
BI_04 05
Opto-_2 06
17192 17192 17192

BI_05 07
BI_06 08
Opto-_3 09
BI_07 10
BI_08 11
Opto-_4 12
BI_09 13
BI_10 14
Opto-_5 15
BI_11 16
BI_12 17
Opto-_6 18
BI_13 19
BI_14 20
17192 17192 17192

Opto-_7 21
22
Figure 6.7-2 BI module NR4504
Table 6.7-6 Pin description of BI module NR4504
01 BI_01 Binary input 01
03 BI_Opto1- Common negative pole 1
17192 17192 17192

Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
17192 17192 17192

22 Reserved.
6.8 DC AO Module (DC Analog Output)

DC AO module can sends DC analog output to regulate an object such as generator power.
NR4411A
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192

Figure 6.8-1 DC AO module
Table 6.8-1 Pin description of DC AO module
01 IOUT1 Positive pole of 4~20mA current output 1
02 SGND1 Common negative pole 1
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
03 VOUT1 Positive pole of 0~10V voltage output 1
04 GND Grounding
05
06
17192 17192 17192

10 GND Grounding
11
12
16 GND Grounding
17
18
17192 17192 17192

19
20
21
IOUT4
SGND4
VOUT4
Positive pole of 4~20mA current output 4
Common negative pole 4
Positive pole of 0~10V voltage output 4
22 GND Grounding
6.9 DC AI Module (DC Analog Input)

DC AI module is used to receive DC analog inputs from transducers for purpose such as
temperature or humidity.
6.9.1 NR4410
The DC AI module NR4410 provides 8 transducer input channels with their configurable input
ranges.
17192 17192 17192

NOTICE!
The DC AI module NR4410 is ONLY applicable to the full width (4U 19") rack with the
following specifications.
Table 6.9-1 Specifications of the DC AI module (NR4410)

Input resistance 235Ω 4.4kΩ N/A 54.2kΩ 248kΩ
Accuracy 0.5%
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
The different DC analog input types can be acquired by configuring the following 3 groups of
jumpers.
Table 6.9-2 Jumper configuration in the DC AI module (NR4410C/D)
Input Range Subtype SX JPX-1 JPX-2
0~20mA NR4410C/NR4410D ON OFF ON
17192 17192 17192

0~5V NR4410C/NR4410D OFF OFF ON
0~48V NR4410D OFF ON OFF
0~220V NR4410C OFF ON OFF
In the above table, X=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
01
+
NR4410
DI1
- 02
GND1 03
04
+
DI2
- 05
GND2 06
07
+
DI3
- 08
17192 17192 17192

GND3 09
10
+
DI4
- 11
GND4 12
13
+
DI5
- 14
GND5 15
16
+
DI6
- 17
GND6 18
19
+
DI7
- 20
21
+
-
DI8
22
17192 17192 17192 Figure 6.9-1 DC AI module (NR4410)
Table 6.9-3 Pin description of the DC AI module (NR4410)
01 DI1+
02 DI1- Transducer input 1
03 GND1
04 DI2+ Transducer input 2
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
05 DI2-
06 GND2
07 DI3+
17192 17192 17192

09 GND3
10 DI4+
12 GND4
13 DI5+
15 GND5
16 DI6+
18 GND6
19 DI7+
Transducer input 7
20 DI7-
17192 17192 17192

21
22
DI8+
DI8-
Transducer input 8
6.9.2 NR4418
The DC AI module NR4418 provides 8 transducer input channels with their configurable input
ranges.
NOTICE!
The DC AI module NR4418 is ONLY applicable to the half width (4U 9.5") rack with the
following specifications.
Table 6.9-4 Specifications of the DC AI module (NR4418)
17192 17192 17192

Input resistance 75Ω 110kΩ 110kΩ 1510kΩ 1510kΩ
Accuracy 0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.5%
NOTICE!
The first 6 input channels of the DC AI module NR4418D are configurable by the
following jumpers that locate on itself.
The last 2 input channels of the DC AI module NR4418D are ONLY applicalbe for the
0~20mA input range.
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
Table 6.9-5 Jumper configuration in the DC AI module (NR4418D)
Input Range Subtype P(X+2)
0~20mA ON or OFF
0~5V or 0~10V NR4418D ON
0~48V or 0~220V OFF
17192 17192 17192

In the above table, X=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (signifies the channel No.).
NR4418
17192 17192 17192
Figure 6.9-2 DC AI module (NR4418)
Table 6.9-6 Pin description of the DC AI module (NR4418D)
17192 17192 17192

Pin No.
01
02
CH1+ (V)
CH1+ (I)
Sign Description
Channel No.1 positive input (voltage)
Channel No.1 positive input (current)
03 CH1- Channel No.1 negative input
04 CH2+ (V) Channel No.2 positive input (voltage)
05 CH2+ (I) Channel No.2 positive input (current)
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
17192 17192 17192

17192 17192 17192

6.10 BO Module (Binary Output)
The BO module outputs command for switching control and signalization. The contacts provided
are normally open (abbreviated as NO) contacts. Up to 10 binary outputs are provided by one BO
module for controlling 5 CB/DS/ES or transformer tap changer. By setting the closing time of NO
contact of each binary output, technician can adopt individual switchgear operating time scheme.
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
01
BO_CtrlOpn01
NR4522 02
03
BO_CtrlCls01
04
05
BO_CtrlOpn02
06
17192 17192 17192

07
BO_CtrlCls02
08
09
BO_CtrlOpn03
10
11
BO_CtrlCls03
12
13
BO_CtrlOpn04
14
15
BO_CtrlCls04
16
17
BO_CtrlOpn05
18
19
BO_CtrlCls05
20
21
17192 17192 17192

BO_Resv
22
Figure 6.10-1 BO module
Table 6.10-1 Pin description of BO module
01
BO_CtrlOpn01 Open output 01
02
03
BO_CtrlCls01 Closing output 01
04
05
17192 17192 17192

06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
15
16
17
18
17192 17192 17192

19
20
21
BO_ROS ROS
22
NOTICE!
The NO contact presented via the pins 21-22 is designated as a Remote Operation
Signal (abbreviated as ROS). Whenever any of the other NO contacts is closed, this
ROS will be issued. It keeps its open state if all the other NO contacts are opened.
NOTICE!
For "4U 19" rack, App1, 2, 3", the binary outputs locate at the BO modules (slots No. 15
and 16) can be used as "Duplicated Binary Outputs" (abbreviated as DBO). DBO
17192 17192 17192

signifies an extra copy output of the original configured binary output.
If there is an output command sent by the device, both the original and the duplicated
output contacts locate at different BO modules will operate at the same time.
Table 6.10-2 Matchup of duplicated binary output
Slot No. of the original BO module Slot No. of the duplicated BO module
12 15
13 16
NOTICE!
The binary outputs for transformer tap changer control are special and fixed.
Table 6.10-3 Binary output for the control of tap changer
17192 17192 17192

Pin No.
13-14 15-16 17-18
4U 19" rack, App 1, 2, 3 14
13-14 15-16 17-18
4U 19" rack, App 4, 5 16
05-06 07-08 09-10
4U 9.5" rack, App 1, 2, 3 08
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
6.11 PLC Module (Binary Output for Interlocking Logic)

This module provides configurable normally open contacts with control of interlocking logic to send
switching output command.
Interlocking criteria can be configured by the auxiliary configuration tool PCS-Explorer.
17192 17192 17192

01
BO_01
NR4522B 02
03
BO_02
04
05
BO_03
06
07
BO_04
08
09
BO_05
10
11
BO_06
12
13
BO_07
14
17192 17192 17192

15
BO_08
16
17
BO_09
18
19
BO_10
20
21
BO_Resv
22
Figure 6.11-1 PLC module
NOTICE!
Binary output contacts of PLC module can also be configured as outputs for
[PulseIO.Sig_**] (Access path: "Status"->"Inputs"->"PulseIO Inputs") in using
17192 17192 17192

PCS-Explorer. Please refer to "Status" in the chapter 8 for more detail.
6.12 PWR Module (Device Power Supply)

The PWR module is a DC/DC converter with electrical insulation between its input and output. It
provides DC power supply for the other modules of this device.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
01
BO_FAIL
02
BO_ALM
NR4304B 03
04
1 BO_Resv1
2 05
3 06
BO_Resv2
4 07
5
6 08
17192 17192 17192

7 BO_Resv3
09
8
9 10
10 BO_Resv4
11
11
12 12
BO_Resv5
13 13
14
15 14
BO_Resv6
16 15
17
18 16
BO_Resv7
19 17
20 PWR+
21 PWR- 18
BO_Resv8
22 GND 19
PWR+ 20
PWR- 21
GND 22
Figure 6.12-1 PWR module
17192 17192 17192

NOTICE!
Several extra contacts (without fault detector element control) are provided by the PWR
module. According to different applications, these contacts' configurations by default
are different. Nevertheless, they can be customized through the auxiliary software
PCS-Explorer.
Table 6.12-1 Pin description of PWR module (App1)
01 BO_COM Common pole
02 BO_FAIL Device failure output (01-02, NC)
03 BO_ALM Device alarm output (01-03, NO)
04
17192 17192 17192

BO_Resv1
05
Reserved
06
BO_Resv2
07
08
BO_ManSync_Resv_01 Reserved output contact 01 for manual synchronism closing
09
10
BO_EmergStop_Tap_Pos Output contact to cut the source of tap changer motor mechanism
11
12
BO_Cls_Resv_01 Reserved output contact 01 for closing
13
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
14
BO_Resv6
15
16
BO_Resv7 Reserved
17
17192 17192 17192

18
BO_Resv8
19
20 PWR+ Positive input of device power supply
21 PWR- Negative input of device power supply
22 GND Device grounded connection
04
17192 17192 17192

BO_Resv1
05
06
BO_Resv2 Reserved
07
08
BO_Resv3
09
10
11
12
BO_Resv5
13
14
BO_Resv6
15
17192 17192 17192

Reserved
16
BO_Resv7
17
18
BO_Resv8
19
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
17192 17192 17192

04
05
06
07
08
BO_Resv3 Reserved
09
10
11
12
13
14
17192 17192 17192

15
16
BO_Resv7
17
Reserved
18
BO_Resv8
19
17192 17192 17192

02
03
04
BO_FAIL
BO_ALM
Device failure output (01-02, NC)
Device alarm output (01-03, NO)
BO_Resv1
05
06
BO_Resv2 Reserved
07
08
BO_Resv3
09
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
10
BO_Resv4
11
12
13
17192 17192 17192

14
BO_Resv6
15
16
BO_Resv7 Reserved
17
18
BO_Resv8
19
17192 17192 17192

01
02
03
BO_COM
BO_FAIL
BO_ALM
Common pole
Device failure output (01-02, NC)
Device alarm output (01-03, NO)
04
BO_ManSync_Resv_Bay1 Reserved output contact for manual synchronism closing (Bay1)
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
17192 17192 17192

12
13
14
BO_Resv6
15
16
BO_Resv7 Reserved
17
18
BO_Resv8
19
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
NOTICE!
The standard rated voltage of PWR module is self-adaptive to 88~300Vdc. If the input
17192 17192 17192

voltage is out of range, an alarm signal (Fail_Device) will be issued. For a non-standard
rated voltage PWR module, please specify when placing order and check if the rated
voltage is the same before putting the device into service.
NOTICE!
Effective grounding is the most important measure for a device to prevent EMI, so
effective grounding must be ensured before the device is put into service.
The PWR module provides the pin No.22 and a grounding screw for device grounding.
The pin shall be connected to grounding screw and then connected to the earth copper
bar of panel via dedicated grounding wire.
NOTICE!
This device, like almost all electronic equipments, contains electrolytic capacitors.
17192 17192 17192

These capacitors are well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not
applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering the device up at least
once a year.
6.13 NET-DSP Module (SV & GOOSE Message)

This module consists of high-performance DSP (digital signal processor), 100Mbit/s optical-fibre
ports, IEC 60044-8 reception port and an IRIG-B clock synchronization port. It supports GOOSE
and SV communication with the use of IEC 61850-9-2 protocol. It can receive and send GOOSE
messages to intelligent control device (IED), and receive SV data from MU (merging unit).
NOTICE!
The NET-DSP module is ONLY applicable in a digital substation and SHOULD

coorperate with merging unit and electronic/optical CT/VT.
17192 17192 17192

The MON module is applied for station layer GOOSE message, while the NET-DSP
module is applied for process layer GOOSE & SV message.
CAUTION!
Do NOT look into the end of an optical fiber connected to an optical port.
Do NOT look into an optical port/connector.
A direct sight to laser light may cause temporary or permanent blindness.
Date: 2018-11-22
6 Hardware
NR4138A
TX1
RX1
TX2
17192 17192 17192

RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
IEC 60044-8 port

Clock synchronization
port (IRIG-B)
17192 17192 17192

Figure 6.13-1 NET-DSP module
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
7 Settings
Table of Contents
17192 17192 17192

7 Settings ............................................................................................ 7-a
7.1 System Settings ............................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Measurement and Control Settings ............................................................... 7-2
7.2.1 FUN Settings ........................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.2 Syn Settings ......................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.3 BI Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.2.4 Control Settings .................................................................................................................. 7-12
7.2.5 TP Settings ......................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.2.6 Interlock Settings ................................................................................................................ 7-14
17192 17192 17192

7.2.7 Transducer Settings ........................................................................................................... 7-14
7.2.8 AC Calbr Settings ............................................................................................................... 7-15
7.2.9 Regulation Settings ............................................................................................................ 7-15
7.2.10 Bay1 Syn Settings & Bay2 Syn Settings.......................................................................... 7-15
7.2.11 PulseIO Settings ............................................................................................................... 7-16
7.2.12 Misc Settings .................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.3 Logic Link Settings........................................................................................ 7-18

7.3.1 Function Links .................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.3.2 GOOSE Reception Links ................................................................................................... 7-18
17192 17192 17192

7.3.3 Misc Links ........................................................................................................................... 7-19
7.4 Device Setup .................................................................................................. 7-19

7.4.1 Device Settings .................................................................................................................. 7-19
7.4.2 Communication Settings .................................................................................................... 7-19
7.4.3 Label Settings..................................................................................................................... 7-27
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
NOTICE!
According to different applications for different engineering requirements, settings may

be different. This chapter describes as many settings as possible to make a reference
for user.
NOTICE!
17192 17192 17192

"XXXX" in the following tables is the wildcard of bay identification that can be set by the
software PCS-Explorer.
7.1 System Settings

Access path: "MainMenu" -> "Settings" -> "System Settings"
No. Item Default Value Range Step(Unit) Description

1 Opt_SysFreq 50.0 50Hz or 60Hz Option of system frequency.
Rated primary current of
2 XXXX.I1n_CT_Measmt 1000 10~20000 1(A)
three-phase CT.
Rated secondary current of
3 XXXX.I2n_CT_Measmt 5 1~5 1(A)
three-phase CT.
5
17192 17192 17192
XXXX.I1n_RCT
XXXX.I2n_RCT
1000
5
10~8000
1~5
1(A)
1(A)
Rated primary current of
residual CT.
Rated secondary current of
residual CT.
Rated primary voltage of
6 XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt 220.00 0.10~1000.00 0.01(kV)
reference side VT.
Rated secondary voltage of
7 XXXX.U2n_VT_Measmt 100.000 1.000~120.000 0.001(V)
reference side VT.
Rated primary voltage of
8 XXXX.U1n_VT_Syn 127.00 0.10~1000.00 0.01(kV)
incoming side VT.
Rated secondary voltage of
9 XXXX.U2n_VT_Syn 57.730 1.000~120.000 0.001(V)
incoming side VT.
Rated primary current vector
17192 17192 17192

10 XXXX.I1n 1000 10~20000 1(A) summation (for multiple
bays).
Rated secondary current
11 XXXX.I2n 5 1~5 1(A) vector summation (for
multiple bays).
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
7.2 Measurement and Control Settings

Access path: "MainMenu" -> "Settings" -> "BCU Settings"
7.2.1 FUN Settings
17192 17192 17192

1 Th_ZeroDrift 0.2 0.0~100.0 0.1(%)
2 XXXX.En_Alm_ROV 0 0 or 1
3 XXXX.UN_Alm_ROV 10 0~100 1(%Un)
4 XXXX.En_Alm_UV 0 0 or 1
5 XXXX.U_Alm_UV 10 0~100 1(%Un)
6 XXXX.En_CT(1, 2)RevPolarity + + or -
7 25.HMI_Mode Bit4 Bit2 or Bit4
8 Cur3P.Opt_CT_Measmt 0 0, 1
9 Vol3P.Opt_UN 0 0, 1
10 Cur3P.Opt_IN 0 0, 1
11 XXXX.En_Alm_VTS 0 0 or 1
12 XXXX.En_Alm_CTS 0 0 or 1
13
14 17192 17192 17192

DPOS.Map
DPOS.t_Alm
0
500
0000~FFFF
0~60000
1
1(ms)
 Th_ZeroDrift
Zero drift threshold to limit the variation influence (of voltage/current) due to temperature or
other environmental factor. Variation less than this setting will be regarded as a zero drift and
ignored.
 XXXX.En_Alm_ROV
Logic link for residual voltage supervision
"1/0": Enable/Disable the alarm function to issue [XXXX.Alm_ROV]
XXXX.UN_Alm_ROV
17192 17192 17192


[XXXX.Alm_ROV].
If (
[XXXX.En_Alm_ROV] = 1,
[XXXX.UN_Pri] > [XXXX.UN_Alm_ROV] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt],
Holding time > 10s
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
Then [XXXX.Alm_ROV] = 1; /* Issue [XXXX.Alm_ROV] */
If (
[XXXX.Alm_ROV] = 1,
[XXXX.UN_Pri] < [XXXX.UN_Alm_ROV] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt],
Holding time > 1s
17192 17192 17192

)
Then [XXXX.Alm_ROV] = 0; /* Return [XXXX.Alm_ROV] */
 XXXX.En_Alm_UV
Logic link for under voltage supervision
"1/0": Enable/Disable the alarm function to issue [XXXX.Alm_UV]
 XXXX.U_Alm_UV
[XXXX.Alm_UV].
If (
17192 17192 17192

[XXXX.En_Alm_UV] = 1,
Ua or Ub or Uc < [XXXX.U_Alm_UV] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt],
Holding time > 10s,
Then [XXXX.Alm_UV] = 1; /* Issue [XXXX.Alm_UV] */
If (
[XXXX.Alm_UV] = 1,
All Ua&Ub&Uc > [XXXX.U_Alm_UV] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt],
Holding time > 1s,
17192 17192 17192

)
Then [XXXX.Alm_ROV] = 0; /* Return [XXXX.Alm_UV] */
 25.HMI_Mode
This setting cooperates with [BI_Rmt/Loc] (i.e. the selection of control mode) and the logic
links to determine the synchro-check mode for CB closing while using remote station control
or control centre.
Four configurable synchro-check modes are available:
 Non-check mode
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
 Dead check mode
 Synchro-check mode
 Loop check mode
Five command types are available for remote control:
 Non-check command
17192 17192 17192



Dead check command
Synchronization check command
 Loop check command
 Normal control command
If (
[BI_Rmt/Loc] = 1 (i.e. remote control mode),
[25.HMI_Mode] = Bit4,
Remote control command type = "Normal remote control command",
17192 17192 17192

Synchro-check mode is determined by the logic links of synchro-check;
Else if (
[BI_Rmt/Loc] = 1 (i.e. remote control mode),
[25.HMI_Mode] = Bit2,
Remote control command type ≠ "Non-check command",
Else If (
[BI_Rmt/Loc] = 0 (i.e. local control mode),
17192 17192 17192

)
Else
Synchro-check mode is determined by remote control command type;
 Cur3P.Opt_CT_Measmt
"1": Inputs Ia and Ic are enough for current measurement (i.e.: Ib is unnecessary).
"0": Inputs Ia, Ib & Ic are all necessary for current measurement.
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
 Vol3P.Opt_UN
If (
[Vol3P.Opt_UN] = 0
[XXXX.UN_Pri] is the voltage input from VT residual (primary value),
17192 17192 17192

[XXXX.UN_Sec] is the voltage input from VT residual (secondary value),
Else if (
[Vol3P.Opt_UN] = 1
[XXXX.UN_Pri] = XXXX.Ua_Pri + XXXX.Ub_Pri + XXXX.Uc_Pri;
XXXX.UN_Sec = XXXX.Ua_Sec + XXXX.Ub_Sec + XXXX.Uc_Sec
/* Vector summation */
[XXXX.UN_Pri] access path: "Measurements"->"Measurements3"->"Primary Values".
[XXXX.UN_Sec] access path: "Measurements"->"Measurements3"->"Secondary Values".

17192 17192 17192
Cur3P.Opt_IN
If (
[Cur3P.Opt_IN] = 0
[XXXX.IN_Pri] is the primary value of the residual current input,
[XXXX.IN_Sec] is the secondary value of the residual current input;
Else if (
[Cur3P.Opt_IN] = 1
17192 17192 17192

[XXXX.IN_Pri] = XXXX.Ia_Pri + XXXX.Ib_Pri + XXXX.Ic_Pri;
XXXX.IN_Sec = XXXX.Ia_Sec + XXXX.Ib_Sec + XXXX.Ic_Sec
/* Vector summation */
[XXXX.IN_Pri] access path: "Measurements"->"Measurements3"->"Primary Values".
[XXXX.IN_Sec] access path: "Measurements"->"Measurements3"->"Secondary Values".
 XXXX.En_CT(1, 2)RevPolarity
Set this setting to be "-" to reverse the analog input CT's polarity:
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
 XXXX.En_Alm_VTS
"1/0": Enable/Disable alarm function of VT circuit supervision.
 XXXX.En_Alm_CTS
"1/0": Enable/Disable alarm function of CT circuit supervision.
 DPOS.Map
17192 17192 17192

"1/0": Enable/Disable alarm function for each [DPOS**]
This logic setting comprises 16 binary bits and is expressed as a hexadecimal number in four
digits from 0000H to FFFFH.
If a bit is configured as "1", alarm function for corresponding [DPOS**] will be enabled.
Otherwise, it will be disabled.
E.g.: If [DPOS.Map] =FFFEH, only the alarm function for [DPOS01] is disabled.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Double point signal 16

Application
17192 17192 17192

Access path of [DPOS**], [NO_DPOS**] and [NC_DPOS**] is "MainMenu" -> "Status" ->
"Inputs" -> "DPS Inputs".
[NO_DPOS**] indicates normally open (abbreviated as NO) contact status of double position.
[NC_DPOS**] indicates normally closed (abbreviated as NC) contact status of double

position.
[DPOS**] indicates status of double position.
For CB: NO contact refers to 52a contact; NC contact refers to 52b contact;
17192 17192 17192

For DS: NO contact refers to 89a contact; NC contact refers to 89b contact;
For ES: NO contact refers to 57a contact; NC contact refers to 57b contact.
 DPOS.t_Alm
Drop off time delay for [DPOS.Alm].
If alarm function for [DPOS**] is enabled, and corresponding NO contact & NC contact are
both open or close for the duration which is greater than "[DPOS.t_DPU_**] + [DPOS.t_Alm]",
an alarm signal named [DPOS.Alm] will be issued.
[DPOS**] access path: "MainMenu"->"Status"->"Inputs"->"DPS Inputs"
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
[DPOS.t_DPU_**] access path: "MainMenu"->"Settings"->"BCU Settings"->"BI Settings"
[DPOS.Alm] access path: "MainMenu"->"Status"->"Superv State"->"BCU Superv"
7.2.2 Syn Settings
1 25.Opt_Mode_SynChk 0 0, 1 1
4
17192 17192 17192
25.U_UV
25.U_OV
25.U_Diff
10
130
10
0%Un~100%Un
120%Un~180%Un
0%Un~100%Un
1(%Un)
1(%Un)
1(%Un)
5 25.f_Diff 0.50 0.00~3.00 0.01(Hz)
6 25.df/dt 2.00 0.10~5.00 0.01(Hz/s)
7 25.phi_Diff 30.00 0.10~180.00 0.01(Deg)
8 25.Opt_Mode_DdChk 7 1~7 1
9 25.En_VTS_Blk_DdChk 1 0 or 1
10 25.En_VTS_Blk_SynChk 1 0 or 1
11 25.t_Reset 5000 5000~30000 1(ms)
12 25.U_DdChk 30 0%Un~100%Un 1(%Un)
13
14
15
17192 17192 17192
25.U_LvChk
25.Opt_U_SynChk
25.phi_Comp
80
0
0%Un~100%Un
0~5
0~360
1(%Un)
1(Deg)
1
16 25.t_Close_CB 0 0~1000 1 (ms)
17 25.Link_BO_Syn 0 0 or 1
18 25.Opt_Side_Measmt 0 0~3 1
19 25.Opt_Side_Syn 1 0~3 1
 25.Opt_Mode_SynChk
The [25.phi_Diff] will be invalid and the voltages phase angle difference will be fixed to 1
degree during synchronism check if this setting is set to "1". While loop check logic will not be
affected.
17192 17192 17192

This setting is specially recommended to use when closing a generator-terminal circuit
breaker in power plant.
 25.U_UV
Threshold of under voltage to block CB closing, and it is expressed as a percentage.
If either side of CB voltage for synchro-check is less than this setting, CB closing will be
disabled.
CB closing will be disabled if any of the following events is met:
1) [XXXX.Uab_Pri] or [XXXX.Ubc_Pri] or [XXXX.Uca_Pri] < [25.U_UV_SynChk] *
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
 [XXXX.Uab_Sec] or [XXXX.Ubc_Sec] or [XXXX.Uca_Sec] < [25.U_UV_SynChk] *

 [XXXX.Ua_Pri] or [XXXX.Ub_Pri] or [XXXX.Uc_Pri] < [25.U_UV_SynChk] *

17192 17192 17192

 [XXXX.Ua_Sec] or [XXXX.Ub_Sec] or [XXXX.Uc_Sec] < [25.U_UV_SynChk] *
 [XXXX.Usyn_Pri] < [25.U_UV_SynChk] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Syn].
 [XXXX.Usyn_Sec] < [25.U_UV_SynChk]*[XXXX.U2n_VT_Syn].
 25.U_OV
Threshold of over voltage to block CB closing, and it is expressed as a percentage.
If either side of CB voltage for synchro-check is more than this setting, CB closing will be
disabled.
CB closing will be disabled if any of the following events is met:
1) [XXXX.Uab_Pri] or [XXXX.Ubc_Pri] or [XXXX.Uca_Pri] > [25.U_OV_SynChk] *
17192 17192 17192

2) [XXXX.Uab_Sec] or [XXXX.Ubc_Sec] or [XXXX.Uca_Sec] > [25.U_OV_SynChk] *

3) [XXXX.Ua_Pri] or [XXXX.Ub_Pri] or [XXXX.Uc_Pri] > [25.U_OV_SynChk] *

4) [XXXX.Ua_Sec] or [XXXX.Ub_Sec] or [XXXX.Uc_Sec] > [25.U_OV_SynChk] *

5) [XXXX.Usyn_Pri] > [25.U_OV_SynChk] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Syn].
6) [XXXX.Usyn_Sec] > [25.U_OV_SynChk]*[XXXX.U2n_VT_Syn].
 25.U_Diff
17192 17192 17192

Threshold of voltage difference to block CB closing, and it is expressed as a percentage.
If the voltage difference between both sides of the CB for synchro-check is greater than this
setting, CB closing will be disabled.
If [25.Opt_U_SynChk] is configured as phase voltage, CB closing will be disabled if any of the

following events is met:
1) [25.U_Diff_Pri] > [25.U_Diff] * [XXXX.U1n_VT_Measmt]/√3.
2) [25.U_Diff_Sec] > [25.U_Diff] * [XXXX.U2n_VT_Measmt]/√3.
If [25.Opt_U_SynChk] is configured as phase-to-phase voltage, CB closing will be disabled if
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
any of the following events is met:
 25.f_Diff
Threshold of frequency difference between both sides of the CB (Δf = |f-fsyn|) for
17192 17192 17192

synchro-check.
If the Δf between both sides of the CB is greater than this setting, CB closing will be disabled.
 25.df/dt
Threshold of df/dt (change rate of frequency difference) between both sides of the CB for
synchro-check.
If the df/dt between both sides of the CB is greater than this setting, CB closing will be
disabled.
 25.phi_Diff
Threshold of phase-angle difference between both sides voltages of the CB for

synchro-check.

17192 17192 17192
If the phase-angle difference between the 2 voltages on both sides of the CB is greater than
this setting, CB closing will be disabled.
25.Opt_Mode_DdChk
The "Dead check mode" is determined by the setting [25.Opt_Mode_DdChk].
[25.Opt_Mode_DdChk] Corresponding dead check criterion
1 Both the incoming side and the reference side adopt dead check.
2 The incoming side adopts live check and the reference side adopts dead check.
4 The reference side adopts dead check.
5 The incoming side adopts dead check.
17192 17192 17192

6 Or:
The incoming side adopts dead check and the reference side adopts live check.
Or:
Or:
Both the incoming side and the reference side adopt dead check.
[25.Opt_Mode_DdChk] will only be valid when this device is set to work in "dead check
mode".
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
In the above table, the criterion for dead check is: a voltage will be regarded as dead if it is
less than [25.U_DdChk]. The criterion for live check is: a voltage will be regarded as live if it is
greater than [25.U_LvChk].
 25.En_VTS_Blk_DdChk
"1/0": Enable/Disable the block function of dead check mode if there is alarm of VT circuit
failure.

17192 17192 17192
25.En_VTS_Blk_SynChk
"1/0": Enable/Disable the block function of synchronism check mode if there is alarm of VT
circuit failure.
 25.t_Reset
Duration of synchro-check. The check will not precede any longer out of this range.
 25.U_DdChk
In "dead check mode", a voltage will be regarded as dead if it is less than this setting.
 25.U_LvChk
17192 17192 17192

In "dead check mode", a voltage will be regarded as live if it is greater than this setting.
 25.Opt_U_SynChk
Synchronism voltage type.
[25.Opt_U_SynChk] Corresponding synchronism voltage type
0 Ua
1 Ub
2 Uc
3 Uab
4 Ubc
17192 17192 17192 5 Uca

should be phase voltage.

should be phase-to-phase voltage.
Access path of [XXXX.U1n_VT_Syn] and [XXXX.U2n_VT_Syn]: "Settings" -> "System

Settings"
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
 25.phi_Comp
Compensation angle for incoming voltage during synchro-check. The summation of the
reference voltage angle and this setting will be compared with the incoming voltage angle.
 For voltage adoption from different sides of transformer;
 For voltage adoption of different phases;
 17192 17192 17192

 Other factors.
25.t_Close_CB
Closing time of circuit breaker.
It is the time from receiving closing command pulse until the CB is completely closed.
 25.Link_BO_Syn
"1/0": Enable/Disable the output function of synchronism binary output in PWR module (B20).
If the device is in local control mode (i.e. [BI_Rmt/Loc]=0) and all the conditions of
synchronism check are satisfied, with [25.Link_BO_Syn]=1, following NO contact(s) (normally
open) will be closed according to application and selection of synchronism check side:
App 1 (Single Bay) B20 08~09
17192 17192 17192

App 3 (Dual Bays)
App 5 (Transformer)
B20 04~05 (Bay 1), 06~07 (Bay 2)
B20 04~05 (HVS), 06~07 (MVS), 08~09 (LVS), 10~11 (LVS BR)
 25.Opt_Side_Measmt
The selection of measurement (reference) side for synchronism check.
 25.Opt_Side_Syn
17192 17192 17192

The selection of synchronism side for synchronism check.
NOTICE!
These two settings, [25.Opt_Side_Measmt] and [25.Opt_Side_Syn], are only valid for
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
the application PCS-9705 Transformer Unit. Their values cannot be the same. Else,
there will be an alarm [Alm_Settings_RSYN].
7.2.3 BI Settings
1 DPOS.t_DPU_** 500 0~60000 1(ms)
17192 17192 17192

2 B**.t_DPU_BI_**** 10 0~500000 1(ms)
"DPU" is the abbreviation of "Delay Pick Up". "t_DPU" refers to "debouncing time".
 DPOS.t_DPU_**
In order to prevent the situation that NO contact & NC contact are both opened or closed
during CB/DS/ES operation process, these debouncing time settings should be configured
to be greater than the duration.
"DPOS" indicates the state of double point.
Access path of [DPOS**] is "MainMenu" -> "Status" -> "Inputs" -> "DPS Inputs".
For CB: NO contact refers to 52a contact; NC contact refers to 52b contact;
For DS: NO contact refers to 89a contact; NC contact refers to 89b contact;

17192 17192 17192
For ES: NO contact refers to 57a contact; NC contact refers to 57b contact.
B**.t_DPU_BI_****
In this device, each binary input has an independent debouncing time setting.
The debouncing time (also called delay pickup time) of binary input is the duration for
confirming binary input state, i.e.: if binary input state changes and remains unchanged
during the duration, and then the binary input state will be confirmed by the device.
7.2.4 Control Settings

1 CSWI**.t_PW_Opn 500 0~60000 1(ms)
contact for opening output
2
17192 17192 17192
CSWI**.t_PW_Cls 500 0~60000 1(ms)
contact for closing output
"DDO" is the abbreviation of "Delay Drop Off" (i.e.: holding time).
7.2.5 TP Settings
1 84.Num_Tap_Pos 26 0~26 1
2 84.Code_Tap_Pos 0 0~3 1
3 84.t_DPU_Tap_Pos 500 0~6000 1(ms)
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
4 84.En_EmergStop_Tap_Pos 0 0 or 1
5 84.t_EmergStop_Tap_Pos 500 0~60000 1(ms)
 84.Num_Tap_Pos
The maximum number of transformer’s tap position, it will take effect only when
17192 17192 17192

[84.Code_Tap_Pos] =3:
 84.Code_Tap_Pos
This is the access mode selection of the tap position of the transformer.
There are 4 modes ("0", "1", "2" and "3") available.
0 No binary inputs will be used for Tap Position Indication (abbreviated as TPI).
1 Binary inputs 15 to 20 will be used as Binary-Coded Decimal code (abbreviated as BCD)

while binary inputs 21 to 40 will not be used.
Binary input 15 is the least significant bit however binary input 20 is the most significant
bit. The first 4 bits are for binary numbers while the 5th bit and the 6th bit represent ten
and twenty respectively.
17192 17192 17192

Examples:
2 Binary inputs 15 to 24 will be used to indicate "0~9", binary inputs 25, 26 and 27 denote
the tap position lower than 10 or between 10 to 19 or over 19 respectively. Binary inputs
28 to 40 will not be used.
Examples:

"0010000100000".
17192 17192 17192

"0100000100000".

"1000000100000".
3 Binary inputs 15 to 40 represent tap positions 1 to 26 respectively. Only one binary input
would be set as 1 among binary inputs 15 to 40.
Binary input 15 indicates the lowest tap position of the transformer.
Binary input 40 indicates the highest tap position of the transformer.
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
Examples:
If binary input 15 is configured as 1 and binary inputs 16 to 40 are all set as 0, it indicate
the tap position is 1.
If binary input 40 is configured as 1 and binary inputs 15 to 39 are all set as 0, it indicate
the tap position is 26.
17192 17192 17192

 84.t_DPU_Tap_Pos
This is the duration for confirming transformer tap position (abbreviated as TP). If TP changes
and remains unchanged for this duration, the TP will be confirmed. Otherwise, the binary input
state will not be confirmed.
 84.En_EmergStop_Tap_Pos
Enable/Disable the function to stop slip of TP immediately. During tap changer control process,
if "slip TP" occurs, the TP will be out of control, and it will step up or down continuously.
An output contact "BO_EmergStopTP" is provided to issue an emergency stop command to

block the power source of the motor of the TP changer.
 84.t_EmergStop_Tap_Pos
This is used to configure the holding time of output contact "BO_EmergStopTP".
17192 17192 17192

7.2.6 Interlock Settings

1 CSWI**.En_Opn_Blk 0 0 or 1
function for opening output.

2 CSWI**.En_Cls_Blk 0 0 or 1
function for closing output.
7.2.7 Transducer Settings
1 B**.DCAI.Opt_Type_Transducer** 0 0~3 1
2 B**.DCAI.Max_Transducer** 250 -60000~60000 1

3
17192 17192 17192

B**.DCAI.Opt_Type_Transducer**
0 -60000~60000 1
These settings are applied to configure DC analog transducer type, and they cooperate with
the jumpers on the DC AI module to match the type.
0 0~5V
1 4~20mA
2 0~250V
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
3 0~48V
 B**.DCAI.Max_Transducer**
Maximum values measured by the transducer.
17192 17192 17192

If the temperature range is -50℃~+50℃, the setting value will be 50.
 B**.DCAI.Min_Transducer**
Minimum values measured by the transducer.
If the temperature range is -50℃~+50℃, the setting value will be -50.
7.2.8 AC Calbr Settings

This menu consists of the parameters to adjust the accuracy of AC analog inputs.
NOTICE!
The function is used to maintain this device and has already been configured by the
manufacturer. It is strongly recommended NOT to adjust it.
17192 17192 17192

7.2.9 Regulation Settings
1 DCAO**.Opt_Type_Regu 1 0, 1 1
2 DCAO**.Min_Regu 0.00 -60000.00~60000.00 0.01
3 DCAO**.Max_Regu 10.00 -60000.00~60000.00 0.01
 DCAO**.Opt_Type_Regu
This setting is applied to set the DC analog output type for regulation.
0: 4~20mA; 1: 0~10V
 DCAO**.Min_Regu
 17192 17192 17192

Minimum regulation value (corresponds to 4mA or 0V) of DC analog output.
DCAO**.Max_Regu
Maximum regulation value (corresponds to 20mA or 10V) of DC analog output.
7.2.10 Bay1 Syn Settings & Bay2 Syn Settings

These settings are similar to those in the "Syn Settings" menu. Please refer to the preamble.
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
7.2.11 PulseIO Settings
This is the width of output signal for the

1 PulseIO.t_PW_** 20000 0~65535 1(ms)
corresponding [PulseIO.Sig_**].
NOTICE!
17192 17192 17192

If [PulseIO.t_PulseWidth_**] is configured as "65535", [PulseIO_Sig**] will be
processed as a permanent signal (i.e.: this signal will not drop off).
7.2.12 Misc Settings
1 CBWear.Th_Wear 8000 0~10000 1
2 CBWear.t_Stat 100 10~200 1(ms)
3 CBWear.Ibrk_01 0.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
4 CBWear.Ibrk_02 4.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
5 CBWear.Ibrk_03 8.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
6 CBWear.Ibrk_04 12.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
17192 17192 17192

7 CBWear.Ibrk_04 16.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
8 CBWear.Ibrk_04 20.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
9 CBWear.Ibrk_04 24.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
10 CBWear.Ibrk_04 28.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
11 CBWear.Ibrk_04 32.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
12 CBWear.Ibrk_04 36.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
13 CBWear.Ibrk_04 40.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
14 CBWear.Ibrk_04 44.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
15 CBWear.Ibrk_04 48.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
16 CBWear.Ibrk_04 52.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
17 CBWear.Ibrk_04 56.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
18 CBWear.Ibrk_04 60.0 0.0~1000.0 0.1(kA)
19
20
21
17192 17192 17192
CBWear.Wear_01
CBWear.Wear_02
CBWear.Wear_03
0
33
0~10000
0~10000
0~10000
1
22 CBWear.Wear_04 92 0~10000 1
23 CBWear.Wear_05 164 0~10000 1
24 CBWear.Wear_06 256 0~10000 1
25 CBWear.Wear_07 369 0~10000 1
26 CBWear.Wear_08 502 0~10000 1
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
27 CBWear.Wear_09 655 0~10000 1
28 CBWear.Wear_10 829 0~10000 1
29 CBWear.Wear_11 1024 0~10000 1
30 CBWear.Wear_12 1239 0~10000 1
17192 17192 17192

31 CBWear.Wear_13 1475 0~10000 1
32 CBWear.Wear_14 1731 0~10000 1
33 CBWear.Wear_15 2007 0~10000 1
34 CBWear.Wear_16 2304 0~10000 1
35 SwitchType** 1 1~4 1
36 Max_CBOpCap** 7 1~7 1
 CBWear.Th_Wear
This is the CB wear alarm threshold. If one of the wear statistic status (i.e.: "CBWear.Stat",
"CBWear.Stat_A", "CBWear.Stat_B" and "CBWear.Stat_C") is greater than the threshold, the
alarm will be issued.
 CBWear.t_Stat

17192 17192 17192
This is the CB position changing period (from closing to opening). It should be greater than
the arc-suppression time.
CBWear.Ibrk_**
The CB breaking current curve.
 CBWear.Wear_**
The CB wear curve.
 SwitchType**
17192 17192 17192

The option of switchgear type.
1: Load break switch; 2: Disconnector; 3: Earthing switch; 4: High speed earthing switch;
 Max_CBOpCap**
CBOpCap is an enumeration representing the physical capabilities of the breaker to operate.

It reflects the switching energy as well as additional blocking due to some local problems.
CBOpCap is always less or equal to Max_CBOpCap and will be implemented based on CB
spring charge status.

None 1
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings

Open 2
Close-Open 3
Open-Close-Open 4
Close-Open-Close-Open 5
Open-Close-Open-Close-Open 6
17192 17192 17192

More 7
NOTICE!
More values (8...n) describe higher operating capabilities. A new value, i.e. a new line in
the table must start alternating with "Close" and "Open" and must end always with
"Open".
7.3 Logic Link Settings

The logic link settings are used to determine whether the relevant function of device is enabled or
disabled.
Access path: "MainMenu" -> "Settings" -> "Logic Links"
7.3.1 Function Links
No.
2
17192 17192 17192
NEWLOCK.Link_IgnExtIntlck
25.Link_DdChk
Name Default Value
0
Range
0 or 1
0 or 1
3 25.Link_SynChk 0 0 or 1
 NEWLOCK.Link_IgnExtIntlck
Enable/Disable interlock logic. If this setting is "0", all the interlock logic from external bay will
be considered as satisfied.
 25.Link_DdChk, 25.Link_SynChk
These logic links cooperate to determine the synchro-check mode for CB closing. Please
refer to "Synchro-check for Manual Switching" in the chapter "Operation Theory" for more
17192 17192 17192

detail.
7.3.2 GOOSE Reception Links
Enable/Disable the GOOSE channel message

1 GLink_SLRL_** 1 0 or 1
supervision in station layer.
NOTICE!
These settings are aimed to avoid issuing disconnection alarms if the corresponding
GOOSE channel is empty due to some situation such as the connected remote device
is out of service.
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
7.3.3 Misc Links
1 Link_** 0 0 or 1 Enable/Disable customized logic link
7.4 Device Setup
17192 17192 17192

Access path: "MainMenu" -> "Settings" -> "Device Setup"
7.4.1 Device Settings

No. Item Default Value Range Step(Unit) Description
Current_Language
Option of caption
1 Opt_Caption_103 Current_Language Fixed_Chinese
language sent to SAS
Fixed_English
24, 48, 110, 220, Rated voltage level of
2 Un_BinaryInput 220 (V)
30, 125 binary input module
Enable/Disable the
auto-popup function for
3 En_PopupRecord_Blkd Disable Enable or Disable
event report in device
LCD.
17192 17192 17192

4 Ctrl_Password 111 0~999 1 Local control password
Enable/Disable the
5 En_NoCtrlPwd Disable Enable or Disable bypass function of local
control password.
7.4.2 Communication Settings

No. Item Default Value Range(Unit)
1 IP_LAN1 198.120.007.100 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
2 Mask_LAN1 255.255.000.000 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
3 IP_LAN2 198.121.007.100 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
4 Mask_LAN2 255.255.000.000 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
5 En_LAN2 Enable Enable or Disable
6 IP_LAN3 198.122.007.100 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
17192 17192 17192

7 Mask_LAN3 255.255.000.000 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
8 En_LAN3 Disable Enable or Disable
9 IP_LAN4 198.123.007.100 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

10 Mask_LAN4 255.255.000.000 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
11 En_LAN4 Disable Enable or Disable
12 Gateway 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

13 En_Broadcast Disable Enable or Disable
14 Threshold_Measmt_Net 1.00 0.00~100.00(%)

15 Period_Measmt_Net 10 0~65535(s)
16 Format_Measmt 1 0 or 1
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings

17 Cfg_NetPorts_Bond 0 0, 3, 5, 6, 9, 10, 12
18 Opt_Conn_Client 0 0, 1, 2
19 En_BICheckBO Disable Enable or Disable

20 En_BICheckLinkCtrl Disable Enable or Disable
Conventional; SAS; Advanced;
17192 17192 17192

21 Opt_TimeSyn Conventional
NoTImeSyn
22 IP_Server_SNTP 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
23 OffsetHour_UTC 8 -12~+12(hrs)
24 OffsetMinute_UTC 0 0~60(min)
25 DST.En Disable Disable or Enable
26 DST.OffsetMinute 60 0~60
Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul,
27 DST.MonthInYear_Start Mar
Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec
28 DST.WeekInMonth_Start 1st 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday,
29 DST.DayInWeek_Start Sunday Wednesday, Thursday, Friday,
Saturday
30 DST.HourInDay_Start 3 0~23
31
32
17192 17192 17192
DST.MonthInYear_End
DST.WeekInMonth_End
Oct
1st
Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul,
Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday,
33 DST.DayinWeek_End Sunday Wednesday, Thursday, Friday,
Saturday
34 DST.HourInDay_End 9 0~23
35 IEDNAME TEMPLATE
36 Opt_DualNetMode_MMS 1 0, 1 or 2
37 En_DualNet_SL_GOOSE Disable Enable or Disable
38 En_TCP*_DNP 0 0 or 1
39 Addr_Slave_TCP*_DNP 2 0~65519
17192 17192 17192

40 Addr_Master_TCP*_DNP 1 0~65519
41 IP_Master_TCP*_DNP 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
42 Opt_Map_TCP*_DNP 0 0~4
43 Obj01DefltVar_TCP*_DNP BISingleBit BISingleBit or BIWithStatus
BIChWoutT, BIChWithAbsTime,
44 Obj02DefltVar_TCP*_DNP BIChWithAbsTime
BIChWithRelTime
AI32Int, AI16Int, AI32IntWoutF,
45 Obj30DefltVar_TCP*_DNP AI32IntWoutF
AI16IntWoutF, AI32Flt
AI32IntEvWoutT, AI16IntEvWoutT,
46 Obj32DefltVar_TCP*_DNP AI32IntEvWoutT
AI32FltEvWoutT
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings

47 Obj40DefltVar_TCP*_DNP AO32Int AO32Int, AO16Int, AO32Flt
48 t_AppLayer_TCP*_DNP 3 1~5(s)
49 t_KeepAlive_TCP*_DNP 120 0~7200(s)
50 En_UR_TCP*_DNP 0 0 or 1
51 Num_URRetry_TCP*_DNP 3 2~10
52
53
54
17192 17192 17192
t_UROfflRetry_TCP*_DNP
Class_BI_TCP*_DNP
Class_AI_TCP*_DNP
60
1
2
1~5000(s)
0~3
0~3
55 t_Select_TCP*_DNP 30 0~240(s)
56 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP*_DNP 180 0~3600(s)
 IP_LAN1, IP_LAN2, IP_LAN3, IP_LAN4
IP address of Ethernet port 1, 2, 3 and 4.
 Mask_LAN1, Mask_LAN2, Mask_LAN3, Mask_LAN4
Subnet mask of Ethernet port 1, 2, 3 and 4.
 En_LAN2, En_LAN3, En_LAN4
17192 17192 17192

Enable/Disable Ethernet port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 in service.
They are used for Ethernet communication based on the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. When the
IEC 61850 protocol is applied, the IP address of Ethernet A will be GOOSE source MAC
address.
Ethernet port 1 is always in service by default.
 Gateway
IP address of Gateway (router)
 En_Broadcast
Enable/Disable UDP messages sending through network
This setting is only used for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.

17192 17192 17192
Threshold_Measmt_Net
This is the threshold to send measurement values to SCADA or gateway.
 Period_Measmt_Net
This is the timing period for this device to send measurement data to SCADA or gateway.
 Format_Measmt
This is the format selection of measurement data sent to SCADA.
0: GDD data type is 12
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
1: GDD data type is 7, i.e. 754 short real number of IEEE standard
 Cfg_NetPorts_Bond
Use this setting to set the channel bonding arrangement of two Ethernet ports in station level
communication link.
For redundancy or increased throughput of the communication, dual network structure may
17192 17192 17192

be adopted along with channel bonding technology. These two bonded interfaces, who share
the identical IP address and MAC address, work in Active-Standby mode. If the link via active
interface fails, the link via original standby interface will be activated automatically to ensure a
reliable communication.
The value of this setting represents a 4-bits binary number. Each bit represents a
corresponding Ethernet port's bonding status. Use the following map to decide the specific
setting value. Additionally, the default value "0" means the channel bonding function is
deactivated.
Bonding Bonding Bonding
Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port 2 Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port 3 Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port 4
17192 17192 17192

Setting Setting Setting
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Value Value Value
0 0 1 1 3 0 1 0 1 5 1 0 0 1 9
Bonding Bonding Bonding
Ethernet port 2 Ethernet port 3 Ethernet port 2 Ethernet port 4 Ethernet port 3 Ethernet port 4
Setting Setting Setting

Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Value Value Value
0 1 1 0 6 1 0 1 0 10 1 1 0 0 12
Ethernet port 1: Bit0, Ethernet port 2: Bit1, Ethernet port 3: Bit2, Ethernet port 4: Bit3
The Active-Standby mode switching logic is:
17192 17192 17192

Take the device Ethernet ports 1 & 2 for example and assume that P1 is connected to NET1
while P2 is connected to NET2.
 After the device is powered on, only P1 is activated when both NET1 and NET2 are
normal.
 If NET1 is abnormal, P2 will be activated if NET2 is normal.
 If NET1 is abnormal, P2 cannot be activated if NET2 is also abnormal. The device will
keep trying on P1.
 If P2 is working, the device will maintain this state even if NET1 has been restored to
normal. It will be switched to P1 only if NET2 is abnormal.
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
 Opt_Conn_Client
Response to multi-client connecting sharing a same IP address.
0: one IP for one client, disconnect the old client when there a new one tries to connect;
1: one IP for one client, refuse the new client when there is already an old one;
2: one IP for multiple clients, support of multi-connection.

17192 17192 17192
En_BICheckBO, En_BICheckLinkCtrl
Enable/Disable the binary input status check function after a contact or logic link control
command output.
These two settings are only valid when using IEC 61850 communication protocol.
If the binary input related check function is enabled, the device will send the control result
report depending on the binary input status. The result is failed if there is no correct status in
20s.
Else if the corresponding check function is disabled, a successful control result report will be
sent immediately after the control command.
 Opt_TimeSyn
17192 17192 17192

There are four options for clock synchronization:
 Conventional
PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level
IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level
PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via a configurable binary input
PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via a configurable binary input
 SAS
SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network
SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
17192 17192 17192


Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol
Advanced
IRIG-B (Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fiber interface
PPS (Fiber): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fiber interface
 NoTimeSyn
When no time synchronization signal is connected to the device, please select this option
and the alarm message [Alm_TimeSyn] will not be issued anymore.
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
"Conventional" mode and "SAS" mode are always supported, but "Advanced" mode is only
supported when NET-DSP module is equipped.
 When "Conventional" mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization

signal, "SAS" mode will be enabled automatically with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]
be issued simultaneously.
 When "SAS" is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the
17192 17192 17192


device will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn].
When "Advanced" mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization

signal connected to NET-DSP module, "SAS" mode will be enabled automatically with
the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] be issued simultaneously.
 When "NoTimeSyn" mode is selected, the device will not send alarm signals without time
synchronization signal. However, the device can still be synchronized when receiving
time synchronization signal.
 IP_Server_SNTP
This is the address of the SNTP time synchronization server which sends SNTP timing
messages to the device.
 OffsetHour_UTC, OffsetMinute_UTC
17192 17192 17192

If the IEC 61850 protocol is adopted, the time tags of communication message are required
according to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
The setting [OffsetHour_UTC] is used to set the hour offset of the current time zone to the
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) zone; for example, if the device is applied in China, the time
zone of China is east 8th time zone, so this setting will be "8".
The setting [OffsetMinute_UTC] is used to set the minute offset of the current time zone to the
GMT zone.
Time zone GMT zone East 1st East 2nd East 3rd East 4th East 5th
Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5
Time zone East 6th East 7th East 8th East 9th East 10th East 11th
Setting 6 7 8 9 10 11
17192 17192 17192

Time zone East/West 12th West 1st West 2nd West 3rd West 4th West 5th
Setting 12/-12 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5
Time zone West 6th West 7th West 8th West 9th West 10th West 11th
Setting -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11
 DST.En
Enable/Disable the Daylight Saving Time (DST) function.
 IEDNAME
IED name of this device. If this setting is modified, the IED name in ".cid" file will be changed
simultaneously and vice versa.
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
 Opt_DualNetMode_MMS
0: Single network;
1: Hot standby mode (always two ports in service);
2: Cold standby mode (only one port in service);
 En_DualNet_SL_GOOSE

17192 17192 17192
Enable/Disable dual GOOSE network for station layer.
En_TCP*_DNP
The logic setting is used to enable or disable network No.* DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
1: enable
0: disable
When network No.* DNP client is not configured to be in service by PCS-Explorer, DNP client
settings corresponding to network No.* will be hidden.
 Addr_Slave_TCP*_DNP
It is the slave address of network No.* DNP client.

17192 17192 17192
Addr_Master_TCP*_DNP
It is the master address of network No.* DNP client.
 IP_Master_TCP*_DNP
It is the IP address of network No.* DNP client.
 Opt_Map_TCP*_DNP
It is the communication map number of network No.* DNP client.
 Obj01DefltVar_TCP*_DNP
It is the “OBJ1” default variation of network No.* DNP client.
BISingleBit: Binary Input format is packed with single bit
 17192 17192 17192

BIWithStatus: Binary Input with status flag
Obj02DefltVar_TCP*_DNP
BIChWoutT: Binary Input Event without time-of-occurrence
BIChWithAbsTime: Binary Input Event with absolute time-of-occurrence
BIChWithRelTime: Binary Input Event with relative time-of-occurrence
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
AI32Int: Analog Input with a flag octet and a 32-bit, signed integer value
AI16Int: Analog Input with a flag octet and a 16-bit, signed integer value
AI32IntWoutF: Analog Input with a 32-bit, signed integer value (but without flags)
AI16IntWoutF: Analog Input with a 16-bit, signed integer value (but without flags)

17192 17192 17192
AI32Flt: Analog Input with a flag octet and a single-precision, floating-point value
Obj32DefltVar_TCP*_DNP
AI32IntEvWoutT: Analog Input Event with a flag octet and a 32-bit, signed integer value (but
without time-of-occurence)
AI16IntEvWoutT: Analog Input Event with a flag octet and a 16-bit, signed integer value (but
without time-of-occurence)
AI32FltEvWoutT: Analog Input Event with single-precision, floating-point value (but without
time-of-occurence)
17192 17192 17192

AO32Int: Analog Output with a flag octet and a 32-bit, signed integer value
AO16Int: Analog Output with a flag octet and a 16-bit, signed integer value
AO32Flt: Analog Output with a flag octet and a single-precision, floating-point value
 t_AppLayer_TCP*_DNP
It is the timeout of application layer of network No.* DNP client.
 t_KeepAlive_TCP*_DNP
It is the heartbeat time interval of network No.* DNP client.
 En_UR_TCP*_DNP
17192 17192 17192

The logic setting is used to enable or disable the unsolicited message function of network
No.* DNP client.
1: enable
0: disable
 Num_URRetry_TCP*_DNP
It is the online retransmission number of the unsolicited message of network No.* DNP client.
(x=1, 2, 3, 4)
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
 t_UROfflRetry_TCP*_DNP
It is the offline timeout of the unsolicited message of network No.* DNP client.
 Class_BI_TCP*_DNP
It is the class level of the “Binary Input” of network No.* DNP client.
 Class_AI_TCP*_DNP

17192 17192 17192
It is the class level of the “Analog Input” of network No.* DNP client.
t_Select_TCP*_DNP
It is the selection timeout of network No.* DNP client.
 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP*_DNP
It is the time interval of the time synchronization function of network No.* DNP client.
7.4.3 Label Settings

No. Item Default Value Description
The description name of GOOSE link (station level). It
1 B**.Name_SL_**_GCommLink SL_** will affect the displayed GOOSE link name in "GOOSE
17192 17192 17192

Superv" and other signals.
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
7 Settings
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
Table of Contents
17192 17192 17192

8 Human Machine Interface ............................................................... 8-a
8.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Design .................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2 Keypad ................................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 LED Indicators ...................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.4 Control Buttons & Switches (Optional)................................................................................. 8-4
8.1.5 Debugging Port .................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.6 Ethernet Port Setup .............................................................................................................. 8-5
8.2 Menu Tree ......................................................................................................... 8-6
17192 17192 17192

8.2.1 Main Menu ............................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.2.2 Measurements ...................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.2.3 Status.................................................................................................................................. 8-14
8.2.4 Records .............................................................................................................................. 8-17
8.2.5 Settings............................................................................................................................... 8-18
8.2.6 Local Cmd .......................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.2.7 Information.......................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.2.8 Test ..................................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.2.9 Clock ................................................................................................................................... 8-22
17192 17192 17192

8.2.10 Language.......................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.3 LCD Display ................................................................................................... 8-22

8.3.1 Overview............................................................................................................................. 8-22
8.3.2 Normal Display without SLD .............................................................................................. 8-23
8.3.3 Normal Display with SLD ................................................................................................... 8-24
8.3.4 Event Display ..................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.4 Shortcut Key Function .................................................................................. 8-29
Date: 2018-11-22
8.4.1 Shortcut Key Configuration ................................................................................................ 8-29
8.5 Keypad Operation .......................................................................................... 8-33

8.5.1 View Device Measurements ............................................................................................... 8-33
8.5.2 View Device Status............................................................................................................. 8-33
17192 17192 17192

8.5.3 View Device Records ......................................................................................................... 8-33
8.5.4 View Device Setting ........................................................................................................... 8-34
8.5.5 Modify Device Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-35
8.5.6 Delete Device Records....................................................................................................... 8-36
8.5.7 Remote Control .................................................................................................................. 8-37
8.5.8 Check Software Version ..................................................................................................... 8-38
8.5.9 View Module Configuration Information ............................................................................. 8-39
8.5.10 Communication Test ......................................................................................................... 8-39
8.5.11 Forced Measurement ....................................................................................................... 8-39
17192 17192 17192

8.5.12 Modify Device Clock ......................................................................................................... 8-40
8.5.13 Select Language .............................................................................................................. 8-41
List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 HMI view (4U 19" rack) .......................................................................................... 8-1
Figure 8.1-2 HMI view (4U 19" rack with Control Buttons & Switches) ................................. 8-1
Figure 8.1-3 HMI view (4U 9.5" rack) ......................................................................................... 8-2
Figure 8.1-4 Navigation keypad with 9 buttons........................................................................ 8-2
Figure 8.1-5 LED indicators ........................................................................................................ 8-3
17192 17192 17192

Figure 8.1-6 Debugging interfaces & cable .............................................................................. 8-5
Figure 8.2-1 Main menu example (LCD 240×128)..................................................................... 8-6
Figure 8.2-2 Main menu example (LCD 320×240)..................................................................... 8-6
Figure 8.2-3 Main menu structure.............................................................................................. 8-7
Figure 8.3-1 Normal display without SLD ............................................................................... 8-24
Figure 8.3-2 Normal display with SLD ..................................................................................... 8-25
Figure 8.3-3 Normal control via SLD ....................................................................................... 8-26
Date: 2018-11-22
Figure 8.3-4 Control with open/close buttons ........................................................................ 8-27
Figure 8.3-5 LCD display of supervision events .................................................................... 8-28
Figure 8.3-6 LCD display of IO events..................................................................................... 8-28
Figure 8.4-1 Shortcut key configuration step 1 ..................................................................... 8-29
17192 17192 17192

Figure 8.4-6 Shortcut key function interface .......................................................................... 8-32
Figure 8.4-7 Shortcut key function password ........................................................................ 8-32
Figure 8.5-1 LCD display of "Device Logs" ............................................................................ 8-34
Figure 8.5-2 Password to modify settings .............................................................................. 8-36
Figure 8.5-3 Confirmation to delete records .......................................................................... 8-37
Figure 8.5-4 Modification of device time................................................................................. 8-41
17192 17192 17192

Figure 8.5-5 Selection of display language ............................................................................ 8-41
List of Tables
Table 8.1-1 Fixed LED indicators ............................................................................................... 8-4
Table 8.1-2 Control buttons & switches .................................................................................... 8-4
Table 8.2-1 Menu description of "Measurements" ................................................................... 8-7
Table 8.2-2 Menu description of "Measurements3" ................................................................. 8-7
Table 8.2-3 Item description of "Primary Values" .................................................................... 8-8
Table 8.2-4 Item description of "Secondary Values" ............................................................... 8-9
17192 17192 17192

Table 8.2-5 Item description of "Phase Angle" ...................................................................... 8-10
Table 8.2-6 Item description of "Primary Power" ....................................................................8-11
Table 8.2-7 Item description of "Secondary Power".............................................................. 8-12
Table 8.2-8 Item description of "Harmonics" ......................................................................... 8-13
Table 8.2-9 Item description of "Synchrocheck" ................................................................... 8-13
Table 8.2-10 Item description of "DCAI Pri Values" ............................................................... 8-14
Table 8.2-11 Item description of "DCAI Sec Values" ............................................................. 8-14
Date: 2018-11-22
Table 8.2-12 Item description of "DCAO Values" ................................................................... 8-14
Table 8.2-13 Item description of "CBWear" ............................................................................ 8-14
Table 8.2-14 Menu description of "Status" ............................................................................. 8-15
Table 8.2-15 Menu description of "Inputs" ............................................................................. 8-15
Table 8.2-16 Item description of "Tap Position"..................................................................... 8-15
17192 17192 17192

Table 8.2-17 Item description of "DPS Inputs" ....................................................................... 8-15
Table 8.2-18 Item description of "PulseIO Inputs" ................................................................. 8-15
Table 8.2-19 Menu description of "Outputs" .......................................................................... 8-16
Table 8.2-20 Item description of "Contact Outputs" .............................................................. 8-16
Table 8.2-21 Item description of "Interlock Status" ............................................................... 8-16
Table 8.2-22 Item description of "Trip Counter"..................................................................... 8-16
Table 8.2-23 Menu description of "Superv Stat" .................................................................... 8-17
Table 8.2-24 Menu description of "Records".......................................................................... 8-17
Table 8.2-25 Menu description of "Settings" .......................................................................... 8-18
17192 17192 17192

Table 8.2-26 Menu description of "BCU Settings" ................................................................. 8-18
Table 8.2-27 Menu description of "Logic Links" .................................................................... 8-19
Table 8.2-28 Menu description of "Device Setup" ................................................................. 8-19
Table 8.2-29 Menu description of "Local Cmd"...................................................................... 8-20
Table 8.2-30 Menu description of "Information" .................................................................... 8-20
Table 8.2-31 Menu description of "Test" ................................................................................. 8-21
Table 8.2-32 Item description of "MMS Comm Counter" ...................................................... 8-21
Table 8.2-33 Item description of "GOOSE Comm Counter" ................................................. 8-22
Table 8.2-34 Menu description of "Device Test" .................................................................... 8-22
17192 17192 17192

Table 8.2-35 Menu description of "HMI Setup" ...................................................................... 8-22
Table 8.3-1 Primary equipment symbols in SLD .................................................................... 8-25
Table 8.5-1 Available device logs ............................................................................................. 8-34
Date: 2018-11-22
8.1 Overview
Operator can access this device from the HMI panel. Local communication with the device is
possible in using a computer via the multiplex RJ-45 debugging port. Furthermore, remote
communication is also possible in using the SAS via communication ports in the MON module.
This chapter describes the human machine interface (HMI), and gives operator an instruction
17192 17192 17192

about how to display or print event report, setting and so on through menu tree and display
metering value, including r.m.s. current, voltage, frequency, etc. through LCD. Procedure to
change active setting group or a settable parameter value through keypad is also described in
detail.
8.1.1 Design
1
HEALTHY
11 PCS-9705
2
ALARM
12
BAY CONTROL UNIT
3 13
4 14
C FUN
5 15
6 16
ENT
7 17
ES
8 18
17192 17192 17192

9 19
10 20
Figure 8.1-1 HMI view (4U 19" rack)
1 11
HEALTHY PCS-9705
BAY CONTROL UNIT
2 12
ALARM
3 13
4 14
I
FUN
5 15
6 16 ENT
ESC
7 17
8 18
9 19
E LO
OT C CK LO
M LO
17192 17192 17192

RE
CK
AL
UN
10 20
Figure 8.1-2 HMI view (4U 19" rack with Control Buttons & Switches)
Date: 2018-11-22
PCS-9705
1 11
HEALTHY
2 12
ALARM
3 13
4 14
5 15
6 16
7 17
8 18
17192 17192 17192

9 19
10 20
FUN
ENT
ESC
Figure 8.1-3 HMI view (4U 9.5" rack)
The human-machine interface consists of a human-machine interface (HMI) module that allows a
communication to be as simple as possible for the user. The HMI module helps to draw your
attention to something that has occurred which may activate an LED or a report displayed on the
LCD. Operator can locate the data of interest by navigating the keypad.

A 320×240 (full width chassis) or 240×128 (half width chassis) dot matrix
17192 17192 17192

backlight LCD display is visible in dim lighting conditions. The
1 LCD
corresponding messages are displayed when there is any operation
implemented.
20 status indication LEDs, 2 LEDs are fixed as the signals of "HEALTHY"
2 LED (green) and "ALARM" (yellow), 18 LEDs are configurable with selectable
color among green, yellow and red.
3 Keypad Navigation keypad and command keys for full access to device.
4 Communication port A multiplex RJ-45 port for debugging.
5 Remote/Local control switch Remote/Local control mode switch (optional).
6 Unlock/Lock switch Switch to bypass interlock check logic (optional).
7 Manual open/close buttons Buttons to manually open or close a switchgear (optional).
8.1.2 Keypad
17192 17192 17192

FUN
ENT
ESC
Figure 8.1-4 Navigation keypad with 9 buttons
Date: 2018-11-22
 "ESC"
 Cancel the operation
 Quit the current menu
 "ENT"
 Execute the operation

17192 17192 17192

"FUN"
Confirm the interface
 Shortcut key function
 "◄" and "►"
 Move the cursor horizontally
 Enter the next menu or return to the previous menu
 "▲" and "▼"
 Move the cursor vertically
 Select command menu within the same level of menu

17192 17192 17192
"＋" and "－"
 Modify the value
 Page up/down
8.1.3 LED Indicators
01 HEALTHY 11
02 ALARM 12
03 13
04 14
05 15
06 16
17192 17192 17192 07

08
09
17
18
19
10 20
Figure 8.1-5 LED indicators
Date: 2018-11-22
Table 8.1-1 Fixed LED indicators
LED Display Description
Off Device is out of service or any hardware error is defected during self-check.
HEALTHY
Steady Green Device is in service and ready for operating.
Off Device is in normal operating condition.
17192 17192 17192

ALARM
Steady Yellow VT circuit failure, CT circuit failure or other abnormal alarm is issued.
"HEALTHY" LED can only be turned on by energizing the device and no abnormality detected.
"ALARM" LED is turned on as long as alarm exists. When all alarm signals disappear, it will be
turned off.
Other 18 LED indicators with no labels are configurable and user can configure them to be lit by
signals of operation element, alarm element and binary output contact according to requirement
through PCS-Explorer software. These 18 LEDs are configurable with selectable color among
green, yellow and red.
All the 20 LED indicators refresh every 30s if there is no change of status.
8.1.4 Control Buttons & Switches (Optional)
17192 17192 17192

Items
Table 8.1-2 Control buttons & switches
Remark
I This button is used to close switchgear if BCU is in local control mode. Press it to output a
manual close command.
I This button is used to open switchgear if BCU is in local control mode. Press it to output a
manual open command.
CK LO
LO
CK
UN
This switch is used to bypass interlock check logic. Switch it to left for ‘Unlock’ or to right for
‘Lock’. "CILO.Disable" status change report will be shown up.
17192 17192 17192

E LO
OT C
M
AL
This switch is used to change the BCU remote/local control mode. Switch it to left for ‘Remote’
RE
or to right for ‘Local’. "BI_Rmt/Loc" status change report will be shown up.
8.1.5 Debugging Port

There is a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel. This port can be used as an RS-232 serial port
as well as a twisted-pair Ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized cable is
applied as a device accessory for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.
Date: 2018-11-22
P2
P1
17192 17192 17192

P3
Figure 8.1-6 Debugging interfaces & cable
P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.
P2: To connect the twisted-pair Ethernet port of the computer.
P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.
The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.
Device side Computer side

No. Core color Function
(Left) (Right)
1 Orange & white TX+ of the Ethernet port P1-1 P2-1
2
3
4
17192 17192 17192
Orange
Green & white
Blue
TX- of the Ethernet port
RX+ of the Ethernet port
TXD of the RS-232 serial port
P1-2
P1-3
P1-4
P2-2
P2-3
P3-2
5 Brown & white RXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-5 P3-3
6 Green RX- for the Ethernet port P1-6 P2-6
7 Blue & white The ground connection of the RS-232 P1-7
P3-5
8 Brown port. P1-8
8.1.6 Ethernet Port Setup

MON plug-in module is equipped with several Ethernet port. The Ethernet port can be used to
communication with PC via auxiliary software PCS-Explorer or SAS, to fulfill on-line configuration
and debugging function. The IP address and subnet mask settings of the corresponding Ethernet
port locate in the menu "Settings -> Device Setup -> Comm Settings".
17192 17192 17192

It should be ensured that the device and PC are in the same network segment.
E.g.: PC: IP address "198.87.96.102", subnet mask "255.255.255.0".
The IP address and subnet mask of the device Ethernet port 1 (if connected) should be [IP_LAN1]
= 198.87.96.***, [Mask_LAN1] =255.255.255.0. (*** can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)
For using a Ethernet port, the corresponding logic setting [En_LANx] (x = 2, 3, 4, etc.) must be "1".
Date: 2018-11-22
8.2 Menu Tree

NOTICE!
According to different applications in different engineering requirements, the display of

menu in HMI may be different.
"XXXX" is the function name substitution for bay identification such as "BayMMXU",
17192 17192 17192

"Bus1_MMXU", "Bay1_MMXU", "Sum_MMXU", etc.
8.2.1 Main Menu

Press "▲" of the normal display and enter the main menu. Select different submenu by "▲" and
"▼". Enter the selected submenu by pressing "ENT" or "►". Press "◄" and return to the previous
menu. Press "ESC" back to main menu directly.
Press "▲" to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:
Measurements
Status
Records
17192 17192 17192 Settings

Local Cmd
Information
Figure 8.2-1 Main menu example (LCD 240×128)
Measurements
17192 17192 17192

Status
Records
Settings
Local Cmd
Information
Test
Clock
Language
Figure 8.2-2 Main menu example (LCD 320×240)
Date: 2018-11-22
Main Menu
Measurements
Status
Records
17192 17192 17192 Settings
Local Cmd
Information
Test
Clock
Language
Figure 8.2-3 Main menu structure
17192 17192 17192

8.2.2 Measurements
Main Menu
Measurements
+ Measurements3
This menu is used to display real-time measured values, including AC voltage, AC current, phase
angle and calculated quantities. These data can help users to acquaint the device′s status. This
menu comprises following submenus.
Table 8.2-1 Menu description of "Measurements"
17192 17192 17192

No. Item Function description
Display measured values and other calculated quantities for measurement

1 Measurement3
and control.
Table 8.2-2 Menu description of "Measurements3"
No. Sign Description
1 Primary Values Display calculated primary values of AC analog input.
2 Secondary Values Display sampled secondary values of AC analog input.
3 Phase Angle Display phase angles of AC analog input.
Date: 2018-11-22
No. Sign Description
4 Primary Power Display calculated primary energy power.
5 Secondary Power Display calculated secondary energy power.
6 Harmonics Display sampled voltage harmonics (up to 15th).
7 Synchrocheck Display calculated relevant values for CB closing synchronization check.
17192 17192 17192

8 DCAI Pri Values Display calculated primary values of DC analog input.
9 DCAI Sec Values Display sampled secondary values of DC analog input.
10 GOOSE Analog Display GOOSE analog inputs.
11 DCAO Values Display values of DC analog output.
12 CBWear Circuit breaker wear statistic data
Table 8.2-3 Item description of "Primary Values"
No. Sign Description Resolution Unit
1 XXXX.Ia_Pri
2 XXXX.Ib_Pri The primary values of three-phase currents. 0.00 A
3 XXXX.Ic_Pri
The primary value of residual current.
17192 17192 17192

If [Cur3P.Opt_IN] =0, it is the residual current input.
If [Cur3P.Opt_IN] =1, it is the residual current
4 XXXX.IN_Pri calculated by the vector summation of XXXX.Ia_Pri, 0.00 A
XXXX.Ib_Pri and XXXX.Ic_Pri.
Access path of [Cur3P.Opt_IN]: "MainMenu" ->
"Settings" -> "BCU Settings" -> "FUN Settings".
5 XXXX.Ua_Pri
6 XXXX.Ub_Pri The primary values of three-phase voltages. 0.00 kV
7 XXXX.Uc_Pri
8 XXXX.U1_Pri The primary value of positive-sequence voltage. 0.00 kV
9 XXXX.U2_Pri The primary value of negative-sequence voltage. 0.00 kV
The primary value of residual voltage.
17192 17192 17192

If [VoCP.Opt_UN] =0, it is the residual voltage input.
If [VoCP.Opt_UN] =1, it is the residual voltage
10 XXXX.UN_Pri calculated by the vector summation of XXXX.Ua_Pri, 0.00 kV
XXXX.Ub_Pri and XXXX.Uc_Pri.
Access path of [VoCP.Opt_UN]:: "MainMenu" ->
11 XXXX.Uab_Pri
12 XXXX.Ubc_Pri The primary values of phase-to-phase voltages. 0.00 kV
13 XXXX.Uca_Pri
14 XXXX.Usyn_Pri The primary value of incoming side voltage for 0.00 kV
Date: 2018-11-22
synchronism check.
15 XXXX.f System frequency 0.000 Hz
16 XXXX.fsyn The incoming side frequency for synchronism check 0.000 Hz
17 XXXX.P_Pri The primary value of active power. 0.00 MW
17192 17192 17192

18 XXXX.Q_Pri The primary value of reactive power. 0.00 MVar
19 XXXX.S_Pri The primary value of apparent power. 0.00 MVA
20 XXXX.Cos Power factor. 0.000
21 Sum_MMXU.Ia_Pri
The primary values of three-phase currents vectors
22 Sum_MMXU.Ib_Pri 0.00 A
summation for dual bays.
23 Sum_MMXU.Ic_Pri
The primary value of active power vectors

24 Sum_MMXU.P_Pri 0.00 MW
The primary value of reactive power vectors

25 Sum_MMXU.Q_Pri 0.00 MVar
The primary value of apparent power vectors

26 Sum_MMXU.S_Pri 0.00 MVA
17192 17192 17192

Power factor of power vectors summation for dual
27 Sum_MMXU.Cos 0.000
bays.
The primary value of independent external current

28 Sum_MMXU.Iext_Pri 0.00 A
input.
Table 8.2-4 Item description of "Secondary Values"
1 XXXX.Ia_Sec
2 XXXX.Ib_Sec The secondary values of three-phase currents. 0.00 A
3 XXXX.Ic_Sec
The secondary value of residual current.

If [Cur3P.Opt_IN] =0, it is the residual current input.
17192 17192 17192

If [Cur3P.Opt_IN] =1, it is the residual current
4 XXXX.IN_Sec calculated by the vector summation of XXXX.Ia_Sec, 0.00 A
XXXX.Ib_Sec and XXXX.Ic_Sec.
Access path of [Cur3P.Opt_IN]: "MainMenu" ->
5 XXXX.Ua_Sec
6 XXXX.Ub_Sec The secondary values of three-phase voltages. 0.00 V
7 XXXX.Uc_Sec
8 XXXX.U1_Sec The secondary value of positive-sequence voltage. 0.00 V
9 XXXX.U2_Sec The secondary value of negative-sequence voltage. 0.00 V
Date: 2018-11-22
The secondary value of residual voltage.

If [VoCP.Opt_UN] =0, it is the residual voltage input.
If [VoCP.Opt_UN] =1, it is the residual voltage
10 XXXX.UN_Sec calculated by the vector summation of 0.00 V
XXXX.Ua_Sec, XXXX.Ub_Sec and XXXX.Uc_Sec.
17192 17192 17192

Access path of [VoCP.Opt_UN]:: "MainMenu" ->
11 XXXX.Uab_Sec
12 XXXX.Ubc_Sec The secondary values of phase-to-phase voltages. 0.00 V
13 XXXX.Uca_Sec
The secondary value of incoming side voltage for

14 XXXX.Usyn_Sec 0.00 V
synchronism check.
15 XXXX.f System frequency 0.000 Hz
16 XXXX.fsyn The incoming side frequency for synchronism check 0.000 Hz
17 XXXX.P_Sec The secondary value of active power. 0.00 W
18 XXXX.Q_Sec The secondary value of reactive power. 0.00 Var
19 XXXX.S_Sec The secondary value of apparent power. 0.00 VA
20
21
22
17192 17192 17192
XXXX.Cos
Sum_MMXU.Ia_Sec
Sum_MMXU.Ib_Sec
Power factor.
The secondary values of three-phase currents

0.000
0.00 A
vectors summation for dual bays.
23 Sum_MMXU.Ic_Sec
The secondary value of active power vectors

24 Sum_MMXU.P_Sec 0.00 W
The secondary value of reactive power vectors

25 Sum_MMXU.Q_Sec 0.00 Var
The secondary value of apparent power vectors

26 Sum_MMXU.S_Sec 0.00 VA

bays.
28
17192 17192 17192
Sum_MMXU.Iext_Sec
The secondary value of independent external current
input.
Table 8.2-5 Item description of "Phase Angle"

0.00 A
1 XXXX.Ang (Ua-Ub) 0.00 deg
2 XXXX.Ang (Ub-Uc) Angles of three-phase voltages 0.00 deg
3 XXXX.Ang (Uc-Ua) 0.00 deg
4 XXXX.Ang (Ua-Ia) Angles between same phase voltage and current 0.00 deg
Date: 2018-11-22
5 XXXX.Ang (Ub-Ib) 0.00 deg
6 XXXX.Ang (Uc-Ic) 0.00 deg
7 XXXX.Ang (Ia-Ib) 0.00 deg
8 XXXX.Ang (Ib-Ic) Angles of three-phase currents 0.00 deg
9 XXXX.Ang (Ic-Ia) 0.00 deg
17192 17192 17192

10 XXXX.Angle(Ua) 0.00 deg
11 XXXX.Angle(Ub) 0.00 deg
12 XXXX.Angle(Uc) Relative phase angles to the phase A voltage whose 0.00 deg
13 XXXX.Angle(Ia) angle is the reference. 0.00 deg
14 XXXX.Angle(Ib) 0.00 deg
15 XXXX.Angle(Ic) 0.00 deg
Table 8.2-6 Item description of "Primary Power"
1 XXXX.Pa_Pri
2 XXXX.Pb_Pri The primary values of three-phase active powers. 0.00 MW
3 XXXX.Pc_Pri
6
17192 17192 17192
XXXX.Qa_Pri
XXXX.Qb_Pri
XXXX.Qc_Pri
The primary values of three-phase reactive powers. 0.00 MVar
7 XXXX.Sa_Pri
8 XXXX.Sb_Pri The primary values of three-phase apparent powers. 0.00 MVA
9 XXXX.Sc_Pri
10 XXXX.Cosa
11 XXXX.Cosb Three-phase power factors. 0.000
12 XXXX.Cosc
13 XXXX.P_Pri The primary value of active power. 0.00 MW
14 XXXX.Q_Pri The primary value of reactive power. 0.00 MVar
17192 17192 17192

15 XXXX.S_Pri The primary value of apparent power. 0.00 MVA
16 XXXX.Cos Power factor 0.000
17 Sum_MMXU.Pa_Pri
The primary values of three-phase active power
18 Sum_MMXU.Pb_Pri 0.00 MW
vectors summations for dual bays.
19 Sum_MMXU.Pc_Pri
20 Sum_MMXU.Qa_Pri
The primary values of three-phase reactive power
21 Sum_MMXU.Qb_Pri 0.00 MVar
22 Sum_MMXU.Qc_Pri
23 Sum_MMXU.Sa_Pri The primary values of three-phase apparent power 0.00 MVA
Date: 2018-11-22
24 Sum_MMXU.Sb_Pri vectors summations for dual bays.
25 Sum_MMXU.Sc_Pri
26 Sum_MMXU.Cosa
Three-phase power factors of power vectors
27 Sum_MMXU.Cosb 0.000
summations for dual bays.
17192 17192 17192

28 Sum_MMXU.Cosc
The primary value of active power vectors

29 Sum_MMXU.P_Pri 0.00 MW
The primary value of reactive power vectors

30 Sum_MMXU.Q_Pri 0.00 MVar
The primary value of apparent power vectors

31 Sum_MMXU.S_Pri 0.00 MVA

bays.
Table 8.2-7 Item description of "Secondary Power"
1 XXXX.Pa_Sec
4
17192 17192 17192
XXXX.Pb_Sec
XXXX.Pc_Sec
XXXX.Qa_Sec
The secondary values of three-phase active powers. 0.00 W
The secondary values of three-phase reactive

5 XXXX.Qb_Sec 0.00 Var
powers.
6 XXXX.Qc_Sec
7 XXXX.Sa_Sec
The secondary values of three-phase apparent
8 XXXX.Sb_Sec 0.00 VA
powers.
9 XXXX.Sc_Sec
10 XXXX.Cosa
11 XXXX.Cosb Three-phase power factors. 0.000
12 XXXX.Cosc
13
14
15
17192 17192 17192
XXXX.P_Sec
XXXX.Q_Sec
XXXX.S_Sec
The secondary value of active power.
The secondary value of reactive power.
The secondary value of apparent power.

0.00
0.00
0.00
W
Var
VA
16 XXXX.Cos Power factor 0.000
17 Sum_MMXU.Pa_Sec
The secondary values of three-phase active power
18 Sum_MMXU.Pb_Sec 0.00 W
19 Sum_MMXU.Pc_Sec
20 Sum_MMXU.Qa_Sec The secondary values of three-phase reactive power 0.00 Var
Date: 2018-11-22
21 Sum_MMXU.Qb_Sec vectors summations for dual bays.
22 Sum_MMXU.Qc_Sec
23 Sum_MMXU.Sa_Sec
The secondary values of three-phase apparent
24 Sum_MMXU.Sb_Sec 0.00 VA
power vectors summations for dual bays.
17192 17192 17192

25 Sum_MMXU.Sc_Sec
26 Sum_MMXU.Cosa
Three-phase power factors of power vectors
27 Sum_MMXU.Cosb 0.000
summations for dual bays.
28 Sum_MMXU.Cosc
The secondary value of active power vectors

29 Sum_MMXU.P_Sec 0.00 W
The secondary value of reactive power vectors

30 Sum_MMXU.Q_Sec 0.00 Var
The secondary value of apparent power vectors

31 Sum_MMXU.S_Sec 0.00 VA

bays.
No. 17192 17192 17192

Sign
Table 8.2-8 Item description of "Harmonics"
Description
The secondary value of the 1st~15th voltage

Resolution Unit
1 XXXX.U_Hm**_Sec 0.00 V
harmonic
2 XXXX.U_Hm**_Pri The primary value of the 1st~15th voltage harmonic 0.00 kV
Table 8.2-9 Item description of "Synchrocheck"
The frequency difference between reference side

1 XXXX.25.f_Diff 0.000 Hz
and incoming side for CB synchronism check.
The df/dt difference between reference side and

2 XXXX.25.df/dt 0.000 Hz/s
incoming side for CB synchronism check.
3
17192 17192 17192
XXXX.25.phi_Diff
Phase-angle difference between reference side and
incoming side for CB synchronism check.
The secondary voltage difference between reference

0.00 Deg
4 XXXX.25.U_Diff 0.000 V
side and incoming side for CB synchronism check.
The primary voltage difference between reference

5 XXXX.25.U_Diff_Pri 0.000 kV
side and incoming side for CB synchronism check.
Date: 2018-11-22
Table 8.2-10 Item description of "DCAI Pri Values"
No. Sign Description Resolution
The primary value of DC analog input on the DC AI

1 B**.DCAI.Input**_Pri 0.000
module at slot **.
Table 8.2-11 Item description of "DCAI Sec Values"
No.
1
17192 17192 17192
Sign
B**.DCAI.Input**_Sec
Description
The secondary value of DC analog inputs on the DC

AI module at slot **.
Resolution
0.000
Table 8.2-12 Item description of "DCAO Values"
1 DCAO**.Output No.** DC analog output 0.00
Table 8.2-13 Item description of "CBWear"
1 CBWear.Alm CB wear alarm /
2 CBWear.N_TrpA Detected CB tripping times (phase A) /
5
17192 17192 17192
CBWear.N_TrpB
CBWear.N_TrpC
CBWear.N_Trp
Detected CB tripping times (phase B)
Detected CB tripping times (phase C)
Detected CB tripping times

/
6 CBWear.Stat CB wear statistic data 0.1
7 CBWear.Stat_A CB wear statistic data (phase A) 0.1
8 CBWear.Stat_B CB wear statistic data (phase B) 0.1
9 CBWear.Stat_C CB wear statistic data (phase C) 0.1
8.2.3 Status
Main Menu
17192 17192 17192

Status
+ Inputs
+ Outputs
+ Superv State
This menu is used to display real-time input signals, output signals and alarm signals of the device.
These data can help users to acquaint the device′s status. This menu comprises following
submenus.
Date: 2018-11-22
Table 8.2-14 Menu description of "Status"
1 Inputs Display all input signal states.
2 Outputs Display all output signal states.
3 Superv State Display supervision alarm states.
17192 17192 17192

8.2.3.1 Inputs
Table 8.2-15 Menu description of "Inputs"
1 Contact Inputs Display states of binary inputs derived from opto-isolated channels.
2 GOOSE Inputs Display states of binary inputs via GOOSE communication.
Display states of tap positions.

3 Tap Position
[84.Tap_Pos] is used to indicate transformer tap position.
4 DPS Inputs "DPS" is the abbreviation of "Double Point Status information".
Display state of signal transmitted directly from SCADA by a special control

5 PulseIO Inputs
command.
17192 17192 17192

NOTICE!
The item description the submenu of "Contact Inputs" will be different according to
different application of PCS-9705 BCU. Please refer to the chapter 6 "BI Module (Binary
Input)" for the specific description.
Table 8.2-16 Item description of "Tap Position"
1 84.Tap_Pos Transformer tap position
Table 8.2-17 Item description of "DPS Inputs"
State indication of double position input
17192 17192 17192

1 DPOS** "DPS_INT": Intermediate-state; "DPS_OFF": Open;
"DPS_ON": Close; "DPS_BAD": Bad state.
State indication of double position for normally open (abbreviated as NO)

2 NO_DPOS**
contact
State indication of double position for normally close (abbreviated as NC)

3 NC_DPOS**
contact
Table 8.2-18 Item description of "PulseIO Inputs"
1 PulseIO.Sig_** Be compared to normal remote control command, the
Date: 2018-11-22
Select-Before-Operate (abbreviated as SBO) process is cancelled for these

signals.
BCU receives [PulseIO.Sig_**] and configures the output pulse widths
according to the setting [PulseIO.t_PW_**] in "MainMenu" -> "Settings" ->
"BCU Settings" -> "PulseIO Settings".
17192 17192 17192

Only PLC Module supports this kind of output.
8.2.3.2 Outputs
Table 8.2-19 Menu description of "Outputs"
1 Contact Outputs Display states of binary outputs for control.
2 Interlock Status Display states of interlock logic result.
3 Trip Counter Display switch operation statistic.
Table 8.2-20 Item description of "Contact Outputs"
During tap changer control process, if "running tap" occurs, transformer tap
1
17192 17192 17192
84.BO_EmergStop_Tap_Pos
position will be out of control, and it will step up or down continuously.
This device provides an output contact "BO_EmergStopTP" to issue an
emergency stop command for transformer tap position control. Therefore,
"running tap" can be avoided. Select-Before-Operate (abbreviated as SBO)
process is cancelled here to stop "running tap" immediately.
State of the output contact "BO_EmergStopTP" is displayed as
[84.BO_EmergStop_Tap_Pos].
2 M_CSWI**.BO_Sel State "1" indicates success of selection for manual switch operation
3 M_CSWI**.BO_Exec_Opn State "1" indicates execution of manual opening
4 M_CSWI**.BO_Exec_Cls State "1" indicates execution of manual closing
Table 8.2-21 Item description of "Interlock Status"
17192 17192 17192

1 CSWI**.CILO.EnOpn State "1" indicates satisfaction of all interlock logics for remote opening
2 CSWI**.CILO.EnCls State "1" indicates satisfaction of all interlock logics for remote closing
Table 8.2-22 Item description of "Trip Counter"
1 CSWI**.Trip_Counter Tripping times from BCU control output.
2 DPOS.OpCnt** State change times of double position
CBOpCap represents the physical capability of breaker. It reflects the

3 CBOpCap**
switching energy as well as additional blocking due to some local problems.
Date: 2018-11-22
CBOpCap is always less or equal to [Max_CBOpCap] and will be

implemented based on CB spring charge status.
8.2.3.3 Superv State
Table 8.2-23 Menu description of "Superv Stat"
No.
1
17192 17192 17192
GOOSE Superv
Item Function description
Display GOOSE communication supervision.

Please refer to the chapter 4 for detail.
Display self-supervision of measurement & control function.

2 BCU Superv
Please refer to the chapter 4 for detail.
8.2.4 Records
Main Menu
Records
Disturb Records
17192 17192 17192

Superv Events
IO Events
Device Logs
Control Logs
Regulation Logs
This menu is used to display all kinds of records, including the disturbance records, supervision
events, binary events and device logs, so that the operator can load to view and use as the
reference of analyzing accidents and repairing the device. All records are stored in non-volatile
memory, it can still stock them even if it loses its power.
Table 8.2-24 Menu description of "Records"
17192 17192 17192

1 Disturb Records Display disturbance records of the device.
2 Superv Events Display supervision events of the device.
3 IO Events Display binary events of the device.
4 Device Logs Display device logs of the device.
5 Control Logs Display control (binary output) logs of the device.
6 Regulation Logs Display regulation (DC analog output) logs of the device.
Date: 2018-11-22
8.2.5 Settings
Main Menu
Settings
System Settings
17192 17192 17192 +
+
BCU Settings
Logic Links
+ Device Setup
Confirm Settings
This menu comprises the following submenus.
NOTICE!
Please refer to the chapter 7 for the detail of each setting's description.
Table 8.2-25 Menu description of "Settings"
No.
2
17192 17192 17192
Item
System Settings
BCU Settings
Function description
Check or modify the system parameters.
Check or modify the measurement and control settings.
Check or modify the logic links settings, including function links and GOOSE
3 Logic Links
links.
4 Device Setup Check or modify the device setup.
The menu is hidden by default, and when it is visible, it can be used to

5 Confirm Settings
confirm all settings of this device.
Table 8.2-26 Menu description of "BCU Settings"
1 FUN Settings Check or modify miscellaneous functional settings.
4
17192 17192 17192
Syn Settings
BI Settings
Control Settings
Check or modify manual synchronism-check settings.
Check or modify binary input settings.
Check or modify control (binary output) settings.
5 TP Settings Check or modify tap position settings.
6 Interlock Settings Check or modify interlock settings.
7 DCAI Settings Check or modify DC analog input (transducer) settings.
8 AC Calbr Settings Check or modify AC calibration settings.
9 DC Calbr Settings Check or modify DC calibration settings.
Date: 2018-11-22
10 DCAO Settings Check or modify DC analog output (regulation) settings.
11 Bay1 Syn Settings Check or modify manual synchronism-check settings of bay 1.
12 Bay2 Syn Settings Check or modify manual synchronism-check settings of bay 2.
Check or modify "PulseIO" settings.
17192 17192 17192

[PulseIO.Sig_**]) is used to display state of signal transmitted from SCADA
by a special control command. Compared to normal remote control
13 PulseIO Settings command, SCADA sends a signal directly to PCS-9705, and
Select-Before-Operate (abbreviated as SBO) process is cancelled here.
PCS-9705 receives [PulseIO.Sig_**] and configures the pulse widths
according to the "PulseIO settings"([PulseIO.t_PulseWidth_**]).
14 Misc Settings Check or modify settings for switch type and operating capability.
Table 8.2-27 Menu description of "Logic Links"
1 Function Links Check or modify function links settings.
2 GOOSE Recv Links Check or modify GOOSE reception links settings.
17192 17192 17192

3 Misc Links Check or modify customized links settings.
Table 8.2-28 Menu description of "Device Setup"
1 Device Settings Check or modify device settings.
2 Comm Settings Check or modify device communication settings.
3 Label Settings Check or modify communication description labels.
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
8.2.6 Local Cmd
Main Menu
Local Cmd
Download
17192 17192 17192

Clear Counter
Control
Regulate
Trig Oscillograph
Table 8.2-29 Menu description of "Local Cmd"
1 Download Send out the request of downloading program.
2 Clear Counter Clear statistic data for measurement & control.
3 Control Send out control command locally and manually.
17192 17192 17192

4 Regulate Send out regulate command locally and manually.
5 Trig Oscillograph Reserved.
8.2.7 Information
Main Menu
Information
Version Info
Board Info
MOT Info
In this menu, the LCD displays software information and the configuration of all kinds of intelligent
17192 17192 17192

plug-in modules.
Table 8.2-30 Menu description of "Information"
Display software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,
1 Version Info which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and
management sequence number.
2 Board Info Monitor plug-in modules configuration.
3 MOT Info Display Market Ordering Table (MOT) number
Date: 2018-11-22
8.2.8 Test
Main Menu
Test
MMS Comm Counter
17192 17192 17192 +

GOOSE Comm Counter
Device Test
AC Auto Calbr
+ Interlock Info
+ HMI Setup
This menu is mainly used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the
device.
Table 8.2-31 Menu description of "Test"
No.
2
17192 17192 17192
Item
MMS Comm Counter
GOOSE Comm Counter

Display statistical data of MMS communication.
Display statistical data of GOOSE communication.
Automatically generate all kinds of reports or events to transmit to station

control or control center, including disturbance events, self-supervision
3 Device Test
events, binary events and measurements. It can realize the report uploading
by different classification, as well as the uploading of all kinds of reports.
This menu consists of the parameters to adjust the accuracy of AC analog

input automatically.
4 AC Auto Calbr
This function is used to maintain this device and has already been set by the
manufacturer. It is strongly recommended not to adjust it.
5 Interlock Info Reserved for debugging engineer.
17192 17192 17192

6 HMI Setup LCD display and LED indicators configuration
Table 8.2-32 Item description of "MMS Comm Counter"
"Client" refers to an object that is connected to PCS-9705 via MMS. it can be

a PC with PCS-Explorer tool, a gateway (e.g.: RCS-9698G/H), a station
1 Client_Exist control system (e.g.: PCS-9700 HMI system).
[Client_Exist]= "1": Client exists.
[Client_Exist]= "0": Client does not exist.
Date: 2018-11-22
Table 8.2-33 Item description of "GOOSE Comm Counter"
1 N_GS_NetStorm Times of network storm in GOOSE network.
2 N_GS_SentFail Failure times to send data via GOOSE network.
3 N_GS_DecodeErr Failure times to decode the received data via GOOSE network.
No.
1
17192 17192 17192
Ctrl Events
Item
Table 8.2-34 Menu description of "Device Test"
Reserved for debugging engineer.
2 Superv Events Simulate and issue self-supervision events.
3 IO Events Simulate and issue binary inputs.
4 Measurements Simulate and issue measurements.
NOTICE!
"All Test" means test all the items in the submenu.
"Select Test" means test selectively an item in the submenu.
17192 17192 17192

Table 8.2-35 Menu description of "HMI Setup"
1 Contrast To change de contrast of LCD display
2 BacklitDur To change the duration of LCD backlight
3 SupervLCD To find out dead pixel of LCD display
4 SupervLED To find out broken LED indicator 03~20
8.2.9 Clock
The current time of the internal clock can be viewed and modified here.
8.2.10 Language
This menu is used to set LCD display language.
17192 17192 17192

8.3 LCD Display
8.3.1 Overview
Three LCD display methods are provided in this device:
 Normal display without single line diagram (abbreviated as SLD);
 Normal display with SLD;
 Event display.
If LCD configuration file has been downloaded successfully to this device, SLD will be displayed in
Date: 2018-11-22
normal display. Otherwise, SLD will not be displayed. If any event is detected, the corresponding
event display will pop up automatically.
If SLD is not involved in normal display, user can keep pressing "ENT" and then press "ESC" to
switch between normal display (without SLD) and event display.
If SLD is involved in normal display, user can keep pressing "ENT" and then press "ESC" to switch
between normal display (with SLD) and event display.
17192 17192 17192

Three kinds of event display methods are provided:
 Event display of disturbance records;
 Event display of supervision events;
 Event display of IO events.
Event display of disturbance records can be cleared manually in this way: keep pressing "ESC"
and then press "ENT";
Event display of supervision events cannot be cleared manually, and it will not be cleared until the
corresponding supervision events have disappeared;
Event display of IO events only keeps for several seconds and then it will disappear and return to
normal display automatically.
17192 17192 17192

8.3.2 Normal Display without SLD
After the device is energized, it takes tens of seconds to complete the initialization of this device.
During the initialization of this device, the "HEALTHY" LED indicator of this device keeps being lit
off.
An example of normal display without SLD is shown in the following figure. The LCD adopts white
color as its backlight that will be activated in case of any keyboard operation. Moreover, the
backlight will be extinguished automatically if no keyboard operation is detected for duration.
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
S 2013-01-15 13:22:23
BayMMXU.Ia_Sec 0.0000 A
BayMMXU.Ib_Sec 0.0000 A
BayMMXU.Ic_Sec 0.0000 A
17192 17192 17192

BayMMXU.Uab_Sec 0.10 V
BayMMXU.Ubc_Sec 0.10 V
BayMMXU.Uca_Sec 0.10 V
BayMMXU.Usyn_Sec 0.10 V
BayMMXU.f 0.000 Hz
BayMMXU.fsyn 0.000 Hz
Addr 24343
Figure 8.3-1 Normal display without SLD
S indicates that device clock is synchronized. If "S" disappears, it

means that device clock is not synchronized.
17192 17192 17192

2013-01-15 13:22:23
BayMMXU.Ia_Sec…
shows current date and time of this device, the format is
"XXXX-mm-dd hh:mm:ss".
shows main measurements of this device. If the measurements

cannot be displayed in one page, they will be displayed in several
pages alternately.
Addr 24343 shows address relevant to IP address of Ethernet A. If IP address

of Ethernet A is "xxx.xxx.a.b", the displayed address equals to
(a×256+b). E.g.: if IP address of Ethernet A is "198.087.095.023",
the displayed address will be "95×256+23=24343".
8.3.3 Normal Display with SLD

An example of normal display with SLD is shown in the following figure. LCD configuration file can
17192 17192 17192

be downloaded to this device via network. Control operation through SLD is also supported.
Date: 2018-11-22
Addr 24343 2013-01-01 10:10:00

Bus1
Bus2
M011 M0112
M0131
17192 17192 17192

M01
M0151
M0171
Feeder M01
Ua_Pri: 132.00 kV Ua_Sec: 57.75 V

Ia_Pri: 606.0 A Ia_Sec: 1.01 A
Cos: 0.88
Figure 8.3-2 Normal display with SLD
Signs for the circuit breaker (abbreviated as CB) and switch (DS or ES) are listed in the following
table.
Table 8.3-1 Primary equipment symbols in SLD
17192 17192 17192

Sign Explanation Sign Explanation
Position of CB: Open Position of switch: Open
Position of CB: Closed Position of switch: Closed
? Position of CB: Intermediate state ? Position of switch: Intermediate state
× Position of CB: Bad state × Position of switch: Bad state
8.3.3.1 Control via SLD
In SLD display, press "▲" or "▼" to select a switchgear to be opened/closed, and then press key
"ENT" to control selected CB/switch. After the selection of an open or close operation, the
17192 17192 17192

confirmation window will be valid for a short duration after inputting the correct control password.
This password is configurable by the setting [Ctrl_Password] in the menu “Device Settings”. A
control operation result of success or fail will be returned at last.
Date: 2018-11-22
Step 1: Select the control object Step 2: Select the control operation
CSWI**
Note:
The selected
17192 17192 17192

object will be Open Close
framed in a dotted
line.
Note: From the last step, press “ENT” to popup this
operation selection window.
Step 4: Confirm/Cancel the control operation Step 3: Enter the control password
CSWI** open/close
CSWI** open/close
Password: xxx
Confirm Cancle
17192 17192 17192

Note: Use “←→” and “ENT”to confirm or cancel the Note: Consult or modify the password through
control operation. [Ctrl_Password] in Device Settings.
Step 5: Check the control operation result
CSWI** open/close
Op success
OR
Op fail
Note: Check the operation success or fail result from the

control report.
17192 17192 17192 Figure 8.3-3 Normal control via SLD
8.3.3.2 Control with Open/Close Buttons (if available)
In SLD display, press "▲" or "▼" to select a switchgear to be opened/closed, and then press key
"ENT" to control selected CB/switch. Press the open or close button on the HMI panel and the
confirmation window will be valid for a short duration after inputting the correct control password.
This password is configurable by the setting [Ctrl_Password] in the menu “Device Settings”. A
control operation result of success or fail will be returned at last.
Date: 2018-11-22
Step 1: Select the control object Step 2: Enter the control password
CSWI** open/close
Note:
The selected Password: xxx
17192 17192 17192

object will be
framed in a dotted
line.
Note: From the last step, press a control button to popup
this window.
Consult or modify the password through [Ctrl_Password] in
Device Settings.
Step 4: Check the control operation result Step 3: Confirm/Cancel the control operation
CSWI** open/close
CSWI** open/close
Op success
OR
Op fail Confirm Cancle
17192 17192 17192

Note: Check the operation success or fail result from the Note: Use “←→” and “ENT”to confirm or cancel the
control report. control operation.
Figure 8.3-4 Control with open/close buttons
8.3.4 Event Display

8.3.4.1 Display of Supervision Events
This device can store up to 1024 supervision events. During the operation of the device, the
supervision event of hardware self-check errors or system operation abnormity will be displayed
immediately.
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
S Superv Events
Alm_Device
Alm_Version
17192 17192 17192
Figure 8.3-5 LCD display of supervision events
S indicates that device clock is synchronized. If "S" disappears, it

means that device clock is not synchronized.
17192 17192 17192

Superv Events shows the title of the supervision events.
Alm_Device, Alm_Version shows the contents of supervision events.
8.3.4.2 Display of IO Events
This device can store up to 1024 IO events (i.e.: binary events). During the operation of the device,
the binary input will be displayed once its state has changed, i.e.: from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0".
NO.001 2013-01-15 13:31:23:669 IO Chg
BI_Maintenance 0 1
17192 17192 17192
Figure 8.3-6 LCD display of IO events
Date: 2018-11-22
NO.001 shows the No. of the binary event.
2013-01-15 13:31:23:669 shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is
"XXXX-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:fff".
IO Chg shows the title of the binary event.
BI_Maintenance 0→1 shows the state change of binary input, including binary input
17192 17192 17192

name, original state and final state.
8.4 Shortcut Key Function

The device provides shortcut key function, which can be configured by PCS-Explorer. Some quick
operation can be executed by a combination of keys via device keypad.
8.4.1 Shortcut Key Configuration

1. In the PCS-Explorer configuration software, open the device DEV file. Right-click the menu
"LCD Graph", and select the menu item "Edit Shortcut Key" to display the configuration
interface of shortcut key as shown below.
17192 17192 17192
Figure 8.4-1 Shortcut key configuration step 1
2. In configuration interface, double-click the table item in the list of "Extend Command" to select
LCD extend command of dropdown list corresponding with keypads in front panel as shown
below. Select the first blank item in dropdown list to cancel the setup.
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
17192 17192 17192
3. Double-click the table item in the list of "Attribute" to edit the attribute of keypad in front panel
as shown below. When the attribute is set as "1", the corresponding operation cannot execute
unless input correct password. When the attribute is set as "0" or blank, password is not
required. After finishing configuration, click the button "OK".
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192 Figure 8.4-3 Shortcut key configuration step 3
4. The name description of extend command can be modified in signal setup interface, the
operation "Refresh" in the interface of "Source" must be execute at first before configuring
function shortcut key or generating drive file package.
Date: 2018-11-22
17192 17192 17192
5. Right-click device node and execute the menu "Compress Driver File" to generate drive file
package of the device. The file "LCDConfig.txt" in drive file package of the device records
related contents about shortcut key. If shortcut keys are not required, set "Extend Command"
17192 17192 17192

corresponding with function shortcut key as blank, and generate drive file package of the
device again.
17192 17192 17192


Under main interface, press "FUN" to display the interface of shortcut key function and press
"ESC" to return to main interface.
Date: 2018-11-22
Shortcut keys
[ ] Extended_Command04
17192 17192 17192

[ + ] Extended_Command08
[ - ] Extended_Command09
[ ENT ] Extended_Command10
Figure 8.4-6 Shortcut key function interface
The device support 10 extended command, Extended_Command01~Extended_Command10, and

the name can be modified by PCS-Explorer. The first three extend command is fixed in program,
17192 17192 17192

so only Extended_Command04~Extended_Command10 are configurable, and configured as any
of seven shortcut key functions ("▲", "▼", "◄", "►", "＋", "－" and "ENT").
Password:
000
17192 17192 17192

Figure 8.4-7 Shortcut key function password
Under the interface of function shortcut key, press a shortcut key to execute corresponding
operation. If the attribute of the extend command is set as "1", the corresponding operation cannot
execute unless input correct password. The extend command executed by shortcut key outputs a
pulse signal with 500ms, and for the operation requiring latching signal, the device provides
"T_FF" and "RS_FF" to fulfill the application, which can be configured by PCS-Explorer.
Date: 2018-11-22
8.5 Keypad Operation

8.5.1 View Device Measurements
1. Press "▲" to enter the main menu;
2. Press the "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the "Measurements" menu, and then press
"ENT" or "►" to enter the menu;
3.
4.
17192 17192 17192
Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press "ENT" to enter
the menu;
Press "▲" or "▼" to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one display
screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most);
5. Press "◄" or "►" to select pervious or next command menu;
6. Press "ENT" or "ESC" to exit this menu (returning to the "Measurements" menu);
8.5.2 View Device Status

1. Press "▲" to enter the main menu.
2. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the "Status" menu, and then press "ENT" or "►" to
enter the menu.
3.
17192 17192 17192
Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press "ENT" to
enter the submenu.
4. Press "▲" or "▼" to page up/down (if not all information can be displayed in one display
screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
5. Press "◄" or "►" to select pervious or next command menu.
6. Press "ENT" or "ESC" to exit this menu (returning to the "Status" menu).
8.5.3 View Device Records

2. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the "Records" menu, and then press "ENT" or "►" to
enter the menu;
3.
17192 17192 17192
Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press "ENT" to enter
the menu;
4. Press "▲" or "▼" to page up/down;
5. Press "＋" or "－" to select pervious or next record;
7. Press "ENT" or "ESC" to exit this menu (returning to the "Records" menu).
An example of the command menu "Device Logs" is shown in the following figure. Displays of
other command menus (for example, "Disturb Records") are similar.
Date: 2018-11-22
Device Logs NO.60

2013-01-28 10:18:47:569ms
Reboot
17192 17192 17192
Figure 8.5-1 LCD display of "Device Logs"
Device Logs NO. 60 shows the title and the No. of the device log. This device can store
up to 1024 device logs.
Reboot
17192 17192 17192
2013-01-28 10:18:47:569ms shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is
"XXXX-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:fff".
shows the content of the device log.
Available device logs are listed in the following table.
Table 8.5-1 Available device logs
No. Message Description

1 Report_Cleared All device records (except device logs) have been deleted.
2 Waveform_Cleared All waveforms have been deleted.
3 Reboot The device has been rebooted.
4 Settings_Chgd Device settings have changed.
5 Process_Exit One or more processes are out of service.
1.
17192 17192 17192
8.5.4 View Device Setting
Press "▲" to enter the main menu;
2. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the "Settings" menu, and then press "ENT" or "►" to
enter the menu;
3. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press "ENT" to enter
the menu;
4. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor;
Date: 2018-11-22
5. Press "+" or "-" to page up/down;
7. Press "ESC" to exit this menu (returning to the menu "Settings").
If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scrollbar will appear on the right side of the LCD
to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu and the relative location
17192 17192 17192

of information where the current cursor is pointing.
8.5.5 Modify Device Setting

2. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the "Settings" menu, and then press "ENT" or "►" to
enter the menu;
3. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press "ENT" to enter
the menu;
4. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor;
5. Press "+" or "-" to page up/down;
7.
8. 17192 17192 17192

Press "ESC" to exit this menu (returning to the menu "Settings" );
If selecting the command menu "System Settings", move the cursor to the setting item to be
modified, and then press "ENT".
Press "＋" or "－" to modify the value (if the modified value is of multi-bit, press "◄" or "►" to move
the cursor to the digit bit, and then press "＋" or "－" to modify the value), press "ESC" to cancel
the modification and return to the displayed interface of the command menu "System Settings".
Press "ENT" to automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command
menu "System Settings").
Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are modified,
press "◄", "►" or "ESC", and the LCD will display "Save or Not?". Directly Press "ESC" or Press
"◄" or "►" to move the cursor. Select the "Cancel", and then press "ENT" to automatically exit this
menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu "System Settings").
17192 17192 17192

Press "◄" or "►" to move the cursor. Select "No" and Press "ENT", all modified setting item will
restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the menu "Settings").
Press "◄" or "►" to move the cursor to select "Yes", and then press "ENT", the LCD will display
password input interface.
Date: 2018-11-22
Password:
____
17192 17192 17192
Figure 8.5-2 Password to modify settings
Input a 4-bit password ("＋", "◄", "▲" and "－"). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it,
and then press "ESC" to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface of
the command menu "System Settings". If the password is correct, LCD will display "Save
Setting …", and then exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu
17192 17192 17192

"System Settings"), with all modified setting items as modified values.
NOTICE! After modifying settings of the device, the "HEALTHY" LED indicator of the device will be
off, and the device will automatically restart and re-check them. If the check does not pass, the
device will be blocked.
8.5.6 Delete Device Records

1. Exit the main menu;
2. Press "＋", "－", "＋", "－" and "ENT"; Press "ESC" to exit this menu (returning to the original
state). Press "ENT" to carry out the deletion.
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
Press <ENT> To Clear

Press <ESC> To Exit
17192 17192 17192
Figure 8.5-3 Confirmation to delete records
NOTICE!
The operation of deleting device message will delete all messages saved by the device,
including disturbance records, supervision events, IO events, but not including device
17192 17192 17192

logs. Furthermore, the message is irrecoverable after deletion, so the application of the
function shall be cautious.
8.5.7 Remote Control

2. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the command menu "Local Cmd", and then press
"ENT" to enter submenus. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the command menu
"Control", and then press "ENT" to enter the password.
3. Input a 3-bit password ("111"). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then
press "ESC" to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface of the
command menu "Control". If the password is correct, it will go to the following step.
4. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the control object and press "ENT" to select the
17192 17192 17192

control object.
5. Press "◄" or "►" to select control command press "ENT" or "ESC" to the next/previous step.
Three control commands are optional:
1) Open (Lower) Remote open, or step down transformer tap position;
2) Close (Raise) Remote close, or step up transformer tap position;
3) (Stop) During transformer tap position control process, "Stop" is used to

send an emergency stop command to stop "running tap"
immediately.
Date: 2018-11-22
6. Press "◄" or "►" to select RSYN check mode and Press "ENT" or "ESC" to the next/previous
step.
Five RSYN check modes are optional:
1) NoCheck Without any check
2) SynchroCheck Synchronism-check mode
17192 17192 17192

3) DeadCheck
4) LoopCheck
Dead check mode
Loop check mode
5) EF Line Selection Reserved
7. Press "◄" or "►" to select interlock mode and Press "ENT" or "ESC" to the next/previous
step.
Two interlock check modes are optional:
1) InterlockChk Check interlocking criteria
2) InterlockNotChk Not check interlocking criteria.
8. Press "◄" or "►" to select control type and Press "ENT" or "ESC" to the next/previous step.
17192 17192 17192

Three control types are optional:
1) Select Select control object
2) Execute Execute control operation
3) Cancel Cancel control operation
9. The result of control operation will be shown on LCD. Press "ESC" to return to the 7th step.
NOTICE!
"Execute" operation must be operated after "Select" operation in manual control mode.
8.5.8 Check Software Version

17192 17192 17192

2. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the "Information" menu, and then press "ENT" to
enter the submenu.
3. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the command menu "Version Info", and then press
"ENT" to display the software version.
4. Press "▲" or "▼" to check all the relative information about the software version (CRC code,
management code, program time, etc.).
5. Press "ESC" to return to the main menu.
Date: 2018-11-22
8.5.9 View Module Configuration Information

2. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the "Information" menu, and then press "ENT" or "►"
to enter the menu.
3. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the command menu "Board Info", and then press
17192 17192 17192

"ENT" to enter the menu.
4. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the scroll bar.
5. Press "ESC" to exit this menu.
8.5.10 Communication Test

2. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the "Test" menu, and then press "ENT" or "►" to
enter the menu.
3. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the submenu "Device Test", and then press "ENT" to
enter the submenu and select test item. If "Disturb Events", "Superv Events" or "IO Events"
is selected, two options "All Test" and "Select Test" are provided.
17192 17192 17192

4. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to select the corresponding command menu "All Test"
or "Select Test".
5. If selecting the "All Test", press "ENT", and the device will successively carry out all operation
element message test one by one.
6. If "Select Test" is selected, press "ENT". Press "＋" or "－" to page up/down, and then press
"▲" or "▼" to move the scrollbar. Move the cursor to select the corresponding item. Press
"ENT" to execute the communication test of this item, station control or control center will
receive corresponding message.
7. Press "ESC" to exit this menu (returning to the menu "Select Test"), at this moment, the LCD
will display "Communication Test Exiting…".
NOTICE!
17192 17192 17192

If no input operation is carried out within 60s, the communication test will exit and return
to the "Select Test" menu automatically, at this moment, the LCD will display
"Communication Test Timeout and Exiting...".
8.5.11 Forced Measurement

2. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the "Test" menu, and then press "ENT" or "►" to
enter the menu.
3. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the submenu "Device Test", and then press "ENT" to
enter the submenu "Measurements".
Date: 2018-11-22
4. Press "▲" or "▼" to select the corresponding item and press "＋" or "－" to modify its value.
5. Press "ENT" to force the selected item's measurement. Station control or control center will
receive the corresponding modified value.
6. Press "▲" or "▼" to select items and press "＋" or "－" to modify their values one by one.
7. Press "▲" or "▼" to select the item "All Force Measurement" and press "ENT" to force all
17192 17192 17192

the measurement. Station control or control center will receive the all the modified values.
8. Press "ESC" to cancel all forced measurements and return to the previous menu.
NOTICE!
Forced measurement ONLY affects the values modified and transmitted to station
control or control centre. Primary circuit, secondary circuit and device local logic will not
be influenced.
Forced value will remain during the test until the exit of this menu.
If no input operation is carried out within 60s, this test will exit and return to the previous
menu automatically.
8.5.12 Modify Device Clock
17192 17192 17192

2. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the "Clock" menu, and then press "ENT" to enter
clock display
3. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified;
4. Press "+" or "-" to modify value, and then press "ENT" to save the modification and return to
the main menu;
5. Press "ESC" to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
Clock
Year: 2012
Month: 12
Day: 25
Hour: 14
17192 17192 17192

Minute: 26
Second: 54
Figure 8.5-4 Modification of device time
8.5.13 Select Language

2. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the command menu "Language", and then press
17192 17192 17192

"ENT" to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on LCD.
Please Select Language:
1. 中文
2. English
17192 17192 17192 Figure 8.5-5 Selection of display language
3. Press "▲" or "▼" to move the cursor to the language user preferred and Press "ENT" to
execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD will return to default
display. Otherwise, press "ESC" to cancel language switching and return to the menu
"Language".
Date: 2018-11-22
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
9 Configurable Function
Table of Contents
17192 17192 17192

9 Configurable Function .................................................................... 9-a
9.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Brief of PCS-Explorer ...................................................................................... 9-1
9.3 Brief of SCL Configurator ............................................................................... 9-2
9.4 Configuration Example ................................................................................... 9-2
9.4.1 Binary Output Control ........................................................................................................... 9-2
9.4.2 Duplicated Binary Output Control ........................................................................................ 9-5
9.4.3 Remote/Local Control Mode ................................................................................................ 9-6
17192 17192 17192

List of Figures
Figure 9.4-1 Configuration page of binary output control ...................................................... 9-3
Figure 9.4-2 Configuration page 1 of remote/local control mode .......................................... 9-6
Figure 9.4-3 Configuration page 2 of remote/local control mode .......................................... 9-7
List of Tables
Table 9.4-1 Output contact group .............................................................................................. 9-3
17192 17192 17192

Table 9.4-2 Fault detector element group ................................................................................. 9-4
Table 9.4-3 Output signal group ................................................................................................ 9-4
Table 9.4-4 Binary output for the control of tap changer ........................................................ 9-5
Table 9.4-5 Matchup of duplicated binary output .................................................................... 9-5
Date: 2018-11-22
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
9.1 Overview
The following software tools are designed to realize the configurable functions of this device.
 PCS-Explorer
Support of device configuration, function configuration, LCD configuration, binary input and
binary output configuration, LED indicator configuration and programmable interlocking logic

17192 17192 17192
SCL Configurator
Support of substation & device configuration file's creation & editing, station level inter-device
communication link configuration and programmable interlocking logic
9.2 Brief of PCS-Explorer

PCS-Explorer software is developed to meet customer’s demand on functions of UAPC platform
device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects substation as the core of
data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one substation to govern many
devices. The software provides on-line and off-line functions: on-line mode: Ethernet connected
with the device supporting IEC60870-5-103 and capable of uploading and downloading
configuration files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration. In addition, it
17192 17192 17192

also supports programmable logic to meet customer’s demand.
After function configuration is finished, disabled function will be hidden in the device and in setting
configuration list of PCS-Explorer Software. The user can select to show or hide some setting by
this way, and modify the setting value.
Please refer to the instruction manual of PCS-Explorer for detail.
Functions:
 Programmable logic
 Device configuration
 Function configuration
 LCD configuration
17192 17192 17192

 LED indicators configuration
 Binary signals configuration
 Setting configuration
 Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device
 Display of sequence of report (SOE)
 Analysis of waveform
 File downloading/uploading
Date: 2018-11-22
 LCD function shortcut keys configuration
 DNP communication information map configuration
 Export RIO file
 Multi-user access authority management
17192 17192 17192

9.3 Brief of SCL Configurator
SCL configuration tool is developed for the engineered implementation of IEC 61850. It can be
used to create, edit and view *.scd, *.icd and *.cid files which conform to IEC61850-6. Then it will
construct substation's configuration, structure, model, etc. Specially, it can be used to set the
message transmitted inter-bay in station level for interlocking logic.
Please refer to the instruction manual of SCL Configurator for detail.
Functions:
 Creation of SCD file in accordance with IEC61850-6 regulations
 Version management of SCD files
 Construction of substation structure and creation of complete system specification description

(SSD)

17192 17192 17192
Import of IED file into ICD file which conforms to IEC 61850-6
Association of different intelligent electronic devices and their logical nodes (LN) to substation
details, and completion of substation system configuration according to IEC61850-6
 Edition and maintenance of functions and date elements in IED
 Definition of substation communication configuration (inter-device)
 Verification of data templates and handling of conflicts
 Verification of standard SCL schema
 Verification of expanded grammar and semantics
9.4 Configuration Example
17192 17192 17192

Please use the auxiliary configuration software PCS-Explorer to realize the following examples.
9.4.1 Binary Output Control

Trace the following steps to configure binary output for a switchgear or singal control.
1. As illustrated in rectangle in the following figure, open the device DEV file and find the desired
binary output (according to the slot number of BO module) in the left submenu "Program
Config" -> "Slot**: BO_*".
There are 3 parts illustrated in ellipse in the configuration page and all of them should be
correctly configured to realize a successful binary output.
Date: 2018-11-22
1
2 4
17192 17192 17192

3
Figure 9.4-1 Configuration page of binary output control
2. The "Ellipse 2" signifies "Output". The left part shows the output relays. The right part shows
the output contacts at this BO module.
CSWI**.out_Rly_Opn Output relay for opening
CSWI**.out_Rly_Cls Output relay for closing
17192 17192 17192

BO_**
NOTICE!
Output contact
Normally, for safety operation consideration, each two output contacts are suggested to
form an output group.
Table 9.4-1 Output contact group
Group 1 BO_01 & BO_02

17192 17192 17192

NOTICE!
The left relays SHOULD be connected to the right contacts. However, one group of
output relays (opening & closing) can be connected to any group of output contacts. For
example:
CSWI01.out_Rly_Opn -> BO_03, CSWI01.out_Rly_Cls -> BO_04 or

CSWI01.out_Rly_Opn -> BO_10, CSWI01.out_Rly_Cls -> BO_09.
3. The "Ellipse 3" signifies "Pickup status". The left part shows the pickup signals. The right part
shows the fault detector elements of output contacts.
CSWI**.ObjCtrl_Pkp Pickup signal
Date: 2018-11-22
FD_BO_**&** A group of 2 fault detector elements
NOTICE!
For safety operation consideration, each two fault detector elements are fixed to form a
FD group and share one pickup singal.
Table 9.4-2 Fault detector element group
17192 17192 17192 Group 1

Group 2
Group 3
FD_BO_01&02
FD_BO_03&04
FD_BO_05&06
Group 4 FD_BO_07&08
Group 5 FD_BO_09&10
NOTICE!
The left signals SHOULD be connected to the right elements. However, one signal can
be connected to any group of elements. For example:
CSWI01.ObjCtrl_Pkp -> FD_BO_01&02 or CSWI01.ObjCtrl_Pkp -> FD_BO_07&08.
4. The "Ellipse 4" signifies "Relay check". The left part shows the output signals. The right part
shows the operation relays' status.
17192 17192 17192

B**.BO_**.State
CSWI**.in_State_Opn
Output signal
Output relay status for opening
CSWI**.in_State_Cls Output relay status for closing
NOTICE!
Normally, for safety operation consideration, each two output signals are suggested to
form an output group.
Table 9.4-3 Output signal group
Group 1 B**.BO_01.State & B**.BO_02.State

17192 17192 17192

NOTICE!
Group 4
Group 5
B**.BO_07.State & B**.BO_08.State
B**.BO_09.State & B**.BO_10.State
The left signals SHOULD be connected to the right status. However, one group of
output signals can be connected to any group of relay status. For example:
B**.BO_01.State -> CSWI01.in_State_Opn, B**.BO_02.State -> CSWI01.in_State_Cls

or B**.BO_01.State -> CSWI03.in_State_Opn, B**.BO_02.State ->
CSWI03.in_State_Cls.
Date: 2018-11-22
5. At the end of the configuration, the compatibility of the three ellipses should be checked to
complete a binary output control function. E.g.:
If
CSWI01.out_Rly_Opn -> BO_08, CSWI01.out_Rly_Cls -> BO_07 (Group 4)
Then
17192 17192 17192

CSWI01.ObjCtrl_Pkp -> FD_BO_07&08,
B**.BO_08.State -> CSWI01.in_State_Opn, B**.BO_07.State -> CSWI01.in_State_Cls
NOTICE!
The binary outputs for transformer tap changer control are special and fixed.
Table 9.4-4 Binary output for the control of tap changer
Pin No.
13-14 15-16 17-18
4U 19" rack, App 1, 2, 3 14
13-14 15-16 17-18
4U 19" rack, App 4, 5 16
17192 17192 17192

05-06 07-08 09-10
4U 9.5" rack, App 1, 2, 3 08
9.4.2 Duplicated Binary Output Control

For "4U 19" rack, App1, 2, 3", the binary outputs locate at the BO modules (slots No. 15 and 16)
can be used as "Duplicated Binary Outputs" (abbreviated as DBO). DBO signifies an extra copy
output of the original configured binary output.
If there is an output command sent by the device, both the original and the duplicated output
contacts locate at different BO modules will operate at the same time.
Table 9.4-5 Matchup of duplicated binary output
Slot No. of the original BO module Slot No. of the duplicated BO module
17192 17192 17192

12 15
13 16
To perform the configuration of Duplicated Binary Output Control:
1. Trace the steps 1~5 in the above section "Binary Output Control" to configure the original BO
module (slot No.12 or 13).
2. Trace the steps 1, 2, 3, 5 in the above section "Binary Output Control" to configure the
duplicated BO module (slot No.15 or 16).
Date: 2018-11-22
NOTICE!
The "Ellipse 4 Relay check" should NOT be configured for duplicated binary output.
9.4.3 Remote/Local Control Mode

Trace the following steps to configure the remote/local control mode for a switchgear or singal
control.
17192 17192 17192

5
1 2 3
17192 17192 17192Figure 9.4-2 Configuration page 1 of remote/local control mode
1. As illustrated in "Rectangle 1" in the following figure, open the device DEV file and open the
left submenu "Program Config" -> "Slot01: OMAP_0" -> "Main_DSP" ->
"UserPage_CSWI_Remote".
There are 3 parties illustrated in ellipse in the configuration page and some of them should be
correctly configured to realize a successful control mode.
2. The "Ellipse 2" signifies "Remote control mode". The left part shows the initiation signals of
remote control mode. The right part shows the remote control inputs for each binary output
contact.
NR4501_Din.Din3_X4 The default initiation signal of remote control mode
17192 17192 17192

CSWI**.remote Remote control input
NOTICE!
"NR4501_Din.Din3_X4" is the default initiation signal of remote control mode for all
binary output contacts. It is strongly recommended NOT to change it.
3. The "Ellipse 3" signifies "Local control mode". The left part shows the initiation signals of
local control mode. The right part shows the local control inputs for each binary output contact.
B06.BI_02 An example initiation signal of local control mode extracted

from the "Rectangle 5", i.e.: a source binary input signal from
one BI module.
Date: 2018-11-22
CSWI**.local Local control input
NOTICE!
By default, this device use only one binary input ("BI_Rmt/Loc", which locates at the
first BI module NR4501 BI_04, please refer to the chapter "Hardware" for more detail)
to select the remote/local control mode.
17192 17192 17192

If "BI_Rmt/Loc" = 1, Remote control mode; Else if "BI_Rmt/Loc" = 0, Local control
mode.
Thus, only "CSWI**.remote" needs to be connected while the connection with

"CSWI**.local" can be left empty.
4. The "Ellipse 4" signifies "Remote control mode" for DC analog output. The left part shows the
initiation signals of remote control mode. The right part shows the remote control inputs for
each DC analog output channel.
NR4501_Din.Din3_X4 The default initiation signal of remote control mode
DCAO**.in_remote Remote control input for DC analog output channel
NOTICE!
"NR4501_Din.Din3_X4" is the default initiation signal of remote control mode for all DC
17192 17192 17192

analog output channels. It is strongly recommended NOT to change it.
5. The following steps SHOULD be preceded only if the default Remote/Local Control Mode
configuration has been modified, i.e.: a signal other than "NR4501_Din.Din3_X4" is used as an
initiation signal.
6
5
7
17192 17192 17192

Figure 9.4-3 Configuration page 2 of remote/local control mode
As shown in the "Ellipse 7", "NR4501_Din.Din3_X4" and "B06.BI_02" are used as initiation
signals of "Remote control mode" for the 2 output controls "CSWI01.remote" and
"CSWI02.remote". Then, "Out.in_remote" should be set as the "OR Gate" result of these 2
initiation signals.
Date: 2018-11-22
Please construct the logic with the help of logical symbols listed in "Symbol Library" ->
"Common" marked in the "Rectangle 6".
6. The same procedure should be done if multiple different signals are configured as initiation
signals for "Local control mode" and "DC analog output".
All the initiation signals for remote control mode will form an "OR Gate" together and be
connected to "Out.in_remote".
17192 17192 17192

All the initiation signals for local control mode will form another "OR Gate" together and be
connected to "Out.in_local".
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
10 Communication
Table of Contents
17192 17192 17192

10 Communication ........................................................................... 10-a
10.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Communication Port ................................................................................... 10-1
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface .............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................. 10-3
10.3 Message Description for IEC61850 Protocol ............................................. 10-4

10.3.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.3.2 Communication Profiles ................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment .................................................................... 10-6
17192 17192 17192

10.3.4 Server Data Organization ................................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.5 Server Features and Configuration ................................................................................ 10-12
10.3.6 ACSI Conformance......................................................................................................... 10-13
10.3.7 Logical Nodes................................................................................................................. 10-18
10.4 DNP3.0 Interface ........................................................................................ 10-21

10.4.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 10-21
10.4.2 Link Layer Functions ...................................................................................................... 10-22
10.4.3 Transport Functions........................................................................................................ 10-22
10.4.4 Application Layer Functions ........................................................................................... 10-22
17192 17192 17192

List of Figures
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ..................................................... 10-2
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ........................................................................ 10-3
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure .................................................................. 10-4
Figure 10.3-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance ......................... 10-6
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
Figure 10.3-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance ....................... 10-7
Figure 10.3-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances .................... 10-8
Figure 10.4-1 Enable the configuration of DNP3.0 .............................................................. 10-21
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
10.1 Overview
This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of this device. This device supports
several protocols via communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet). The protocol provided by the
device can be chosen from the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”.
17192 17192 17192

The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection of whichever
protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 devices can be
“daisy chained” together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.
It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to fully detail the
protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this
information. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the
device.
10.2 Communication Port
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface

This device provides several rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three terminals
17192 17192 17192

in the connector located on the back of the device and each port has a ground terminal for the
earth shield of the communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485 serial data communication
and are intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a remote control center.
10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus
The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
10.2.1.2 Bus Termination
The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to the following figure). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
17192 17192 17192

terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so if it is located at the bus terminus then an external termination resistor will be required.
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
Master 120Ohm
120Ohm
17192 17192 17192 Slave Slave
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements

Slave
10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies
The EIA RS-485 standard requires that each device be directly connected to the physical cable
that is the communications bus. Stubs and tees are expressly forbidden, such as star topologies.
Loop bus topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden by it.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length must
not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end, normally
at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially when the
17192 17192 17192

cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. At no stage must the signal ground be connected to the cables
screen or to the product’s chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
10.2.1.4 Biasing
It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state because the bus is not being actively driven. This can occur when
all the slaves are in receive mode and the master is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit
mode. This may be because the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high
impedance state, until it has something to transmit. Jabber causes the receiving device(s) to miss
the first bits of the first character in the packet, which results in the slave rejecting the message
17192 17192 17192

and consequentially not responding. Symptoms of these are poor response times (due to retries),
increasing message error counters, erratic communications, and even a complete failure to
communicate.
Biasing requires that the signal lines be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V. There
should only be one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection point.
The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise, noise will be injected. Note that some
devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias, in which case external components will
not be required.
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
NOTICE!
It is extremely important that the 120Ω termination resistors be fitted. Failure to do so

will result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the
bus.
NOTICE!
17192 17192 17192

As the field voltage is much higher than that required, damage may occur to a device.
NOTICE!
Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (e.g. powering logic
inputs) as this may cause noise to the communication network.
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface

This device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached each
other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the menu “Settings→Device
Setup→Comm Settings”.
10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable
It is recommended to use twisted shielded eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown below.
17192 17192 17192
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable
10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies
Each equipment is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a
17192 17192 17192

star structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is
connected to the exchanger and will play a role as master station, other equipment connected to
the exchanger will play a role as slave unit.
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
SCADA
Switch: Net A
Switch: Net B
17192 17192 17192 ……
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure
10.3 Message Description for IEC61850 Protocol
10.3.1 Overview
The IEC61850 software module is adopted in the device.
The IEC61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
17192 17192 17192

equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
 IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview
 IEC 61850-2: Glossary
 IEC 61850-3: General requirements
 IEC 61850-4: System and project management
 IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models
 IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations

related to IEDs
17192 17192 17192

 IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment–
Principles and models
 IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)
Common data classes
Compatible logical node classes and data classes
 IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
 IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
 IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3
17192 17192 17192

 IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC61850 implementation obtain this document set.
10.3.2 Communication Profiles

This device supports IEC61850 server services over TCP/IP communication protocol stacks. The
TCP/IP profile requires this device to have an IP address to establish communications. These
addresses are located in the submenu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”.
10.3.2.1 MMS protocol
IEC61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
17192 17192 17192

environment. IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to actual MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.
10.3.2.2 Client / Server
This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection and communication activity

is initiated and controlled by the client. Substation computers running HMI programs or SOE
logging software are considered as IEC61850 clients. Substation equipment such as protection
relays, meters, instrument transformers, tap changers, or bay control units are considered as
IEC61850 servers.
Please note that gateways can be considered as clients and servers subject to the communication
object. When retrieving data from IEDs within the substation, the gateways are considered as
servers whereas transmitting data to control centers, the gateways are considered as clients.
10.3.2.3 Peer-To-Peer
17192 17192 17192

This is a non-connection-oriented, high-speed type of communication usually between substation
equipment, such as protection relays, bay control units. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer
communication.
10.3.2.4 Substation Configuration Language (SCL)
A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED configurations and
communication systems according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has
an IED Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The
substation single line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The
entire substation configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
SCD file is the combination of the following items: individual ICD files, SSD file, communication
system parameters (MMS, GOOSE control block, SV control block), as well as GOOSE/SV
connection relationship amongst IEDs.
10.3.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment

To enhance the stability and reliability of SAS, dual-MMS Ethernet is widely adopted. This section
is applied to introduce the details of dual-MMS Ethernet technology. Generally, single-MMS
17192 17192 17192

Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of 110kV and lower voltage levels, while
dual-MMS Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of voltage levels above 110kV.
Client-server mode is adopted: clients (SCADA, control center and etc.) communicate with the
IEDs via MMS communication network, and the IEDs operate as the servers. IEDs are connected
to clients passively, and they can interact with the clients according to the configuration and the
issued command of the clients.
Three modes for dual-MMS Ethernet (abbreviated as dual-net) are provided as below.
NOTICE!
Hereinafter, the normal operation status of net means the physical link and TCP link are
both ok. The abnormal operation status of net means physical link or TCP link is
broken.

17192 17192 17192
Mode 1: Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the same RCB instance
Client Client
Net A Net B Net A Net B
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 1
RptEna = true RptEna = true
17192 17192 17192

Report Control Block Report Control Block
IED (Server) IED (Server)
Normal operation status Abnormal operation status
TCP Link
MMS Link
Figure 10.3-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance
Net A and Net B share the same report control block (abbreviated as RCB) enabled by the client.
IED sends undifferentiated date through dual-net to the clients. If one net is physically
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
disconnected, the flag of RCB instance (i.e.: “RptEna” in above figure) is still “true”. Only when
both Net A and Net B are disconnected, the flag of the RCB instance will automatically change to
“false”.
In normal operation status of mode 1, IED provides the same MMS service for Net A and Net B. If
one net is physically disconnected (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in above figure), the working
mode will switch to single-net mode seamlessly and immediately. Network communication
17192 17192 17192

supervision is unnecessary here, and Buffered Report Control Block (abbreviated as BRCB) need
not to be used. On the other net, date alternation works normally. Therefore, MMS service can
interact normally without interruption. This mode ensures no data loss during one net is in
abnormal operation status.
In mode 1, one report will be transmitted twice via dual nets for the same report instance, so the
client needs to distinguish whether two reports are same according to corresponding EntryIDs.
 Mode 2: Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance
Client Client
17192 17192 17192

Report Instance 1 Report Instance 1
RptEna = true RptEna = true

TCP Link
Main MMS Link
17192 17192 17192

Standby MMS Link
Figure 10.3-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance
In mode 2, the MMS service is provided on main MMS link, no MMS service interacts on the
standby MMS link. The definitions of two links are as follows:
 Main MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service
available.
 Standby MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service not
available.
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
If the main net fails to operate (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in the above figure), the IED will
set “RptEna” to “false”. Meanwhile the client will detect the failure by heartbeat message or
“keep-alive”, it will automatically enable the RCB instance by setting “RptEna” back to “true”
through standby MMS link. By the buffer function of BRCB, the IED can provide uninterrupted
MMS service on the standby net. However, the differences of BRCB standards among different
manufacturers may cause data loss. Moreover, if duration of net switch is too long, the data loss is
positively as the capacity of BRCB’s buffer function is limited.
17192 17192 17192

NOTICE!
In mode 1 and mode 2, Net A IED host address and Net B IED host address must be
the same. E.g.: if the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, network prefix of Net A is
198.120.0.0, network prefix of Net B is 198.121.0.0, Net A IP address of the IED is
198.120.1.2, and then Net B IP address of the IED must be configured as 198.121.1.2,
i.e.: Net A IED host address =1x256+2=258, Net B IED host address =1x256+2=258,
Net A IED host address equals to Net B IED host address.
 Mode 3: Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances
Client Client
17192 17192 17192

Report Instance 1 Report Instance 2 Report Instance 1 Report Instance 2
RptEna = true RptEna = true RptEna = false RptEna = true

17192 17192 17192

TCP Link
MMS Link
Figure 10.3-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances
In mode 3, IED provides 2 report instances for each RCB, Net A and Net B work independently
from each other, failures of one net will not affect the other net at all.
In this mode, 2 report instances are required for each client. Therefore, the IED may be unable to
provide enough report instances if there are too many clients.
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
Net A and Net B send the same report separately when they operates normally, To ensure no
repeated data is saved into database, massive calculation is required for the client.
Moreover, accurate clock synchronization of the IED is required to distinguish whether 2 reports
are the same report according to the timestamps. Clock synchronization error of the IED may lead
to report loss/redundancy.
As a conclusion:
17192 17192 17192

In mode 2, it is difficult to realize seamless switchover between dual nets;
In mode 3, the IED may be unable to provide enough report instances if too many clients are
applied on site.
For the consideration of client treatment and IED implementation, mode 1 (Dual-net full duplex
mode sharing the same report instance) is recommended for MMS communication network
deployment.
10.3.4 Server Data Organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device
can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical
nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data
attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing
17192 17192 17192

various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
The logical node LPHD contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0
contains common information about the IED logical device.
10.3.4.1 Digital Status Values
The GGIO logical node is available in this device to provide access to digital status points
(including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags. The data
content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO provides digital status points for
access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO in order to access digital status values from
in this device. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered reporting features available from GGIO in
order to build sequence of events (abbreviated as SOE) logs and HMI display screens. Buffered
reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the
chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted to HMI
17192 17192 17192

clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block (abbreviated
as BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
10.3.4.2 Analog Values
Most of analog measured values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the others in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Each MMXU logical node provides data
from an IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source.
MMXU1 provides data from CT/VT source 1(usually for protection purpose), and MMXU2 provides
data from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog data objects
are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the corresponding
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical nodes provide the
following data for each source:
 MMXU.MX.TotW: three-phase active power
 MMXU.MX.TotVAr: three-phase reactive power
 MMXU.MX.TotPF: three-phase power factor
 17192 17192 17192

MMXU.MX.Hz:
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB:
frequency
phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
 17192 17192 17192

MMXU.MX.A.phsC:
MMXU.MX.A.neut:
phase C current magnitude and angle
ground current magnitude and angle
10.3.4.3 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes
Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. In this device, most of the public services, the common
settings, control values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public
services may be BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defines for the whole
device; the common settings include all the setting items of communication settings, system
settings and some of the setting items, which can be configured to 2 or more logical nodes. In
LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this Do item indicates the local operation for
complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED will be blocked
and those commands make effective until the item Loc is changed to false. Besides the logical
 17192 17192 17192

nodes we describe above, there are some other logical nodes below in the IEDs.
MMXU: This LN shall be used to acquire values from CTs and VTs and calculate measurands
such as RMS values for current and voltage or power flows out of the acquired voltage and
current samples. These values are normally used for operational purposes such as power
flow supervision and management, screen displays, state estimation, etc. The requested
accuracy for these functions has to be provided.
 CILO: This LN shall be used to “enable” a switching operation if the interlocking conditions are
fulfilled. One instance per switching device is needed. At least all related switchgear positions
have to be subscribed. The interlocking algorithm is a local issue.
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
This LN is used for the interlocking function at station level and/or at bay level.
Interlocking may be totally centralized or totally decentralized. Since the interlocking rules are
basically the same on bay and station level and based on all related position indications, the
different interlocking LNs may be seen as instances of the same LN class Interlocking (IL).
 MSQI: This LN is used for the sequences and imbalances, for example for stability purpose.
17192 17192 17192

This LN is used to acquire values from CTs and VTs and to calculate the sequences and
imbalances in a three/multi-phase power system.
 RSYN: This LN is used for synchrocheck/synchronizing or synchronism check.
 YLTC: This LN is used for changing tap changers of transformer winding for voltage
regulation.
 ATCC: This LN is used for automatic tap changer control.
This LN provides automatic function to keep the voltage of a busbar within a specific range
using tap changers. This node operates the tap changer automatically according to given
setpoints or by direct operator commands (manual mode).
 LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.

17192 17192 17192
GAPC: Generic automatic process control, it is used to model in a generic way the
processing/automation of functions, for example the sequence control functions for this
device.
 CSWI: Switch controller. This class is used to control all switching conditions of XCBR and
XSWI. A remote switching command (for example Select-Before-Operate) arrives here firstly.
 XCBR: Breaker control. The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control
feature.
 XCBR1.ST.Pos: This is the position of the breaker. If the breaker control logic indicates that
the breaker, or any single pole of the breaker, is closed, then the breaker position state is “on”.
If the breaker control logic indicates that the breaker is open, then the breaker position state is
“off”.
17192 17192 17192

 XCBR1.ST.BlkOpn: This is the state of the block open command logic. When true, breaker
open commands from IEC61850 clients will be rejected.
 XCBR1.ST.BlkCls: This is the state of the block close command logic. When true, breaker
close commands from IEC61850 clients will be rejected.
 XCBR1.CO.Pos: This is where IEC61850 clients can issue open or close commands to the
breaker. Select-Before-Operate (abbreviated as SBO) with enhanced security is the only
supported IEC61850 control model.
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
10.3.5 Server Features and Configuration

10.3.5.1 Buffered/Unbuffered Reporting
IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks locate in LLN0, they can be configured
to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes), binary status
values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and MSQI). The
reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via an
 17192 17192 17192

IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.
TrgOps: Trigger options
Bit 1: Data-change
Bit 4: Integrity
Bit 5: General interrogation
 OptFlds: Option Fields
Bit 1: Sequence-number
Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
17192 17192 17192

Bit 4: Data-set-name
Bit 5: Data-reference
Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)
Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
Bit 8: Conf-revision
Bit 9: Segmentation
 IntgPd: Integrity period
 BufTm: Buffer time
10.3.5.2 File Transfer
17192 17192 17192

MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from
this device.
10.3.5.3 Timestamps
The Universal Time Coordinated (abbreviated as UTC) timestamp associated with all IEC61850
data items represents the latest change time of either the value or the quality flags of the data
item.
10.3.5.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes
IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
The name is composed of:
 A five or six-character name prefix.
 A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
 A one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable.
17192 17192 17192

Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is
recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.
10.3.5.5 GOOSE Services
IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific
VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE
publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to configure and control the transmission.
This device supports IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)
communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this
17192 17192 17192

dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is
configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-9705 series bay control units.
IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be
correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the
transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.
10.3.6 ACSI Conformance

10.3.6.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement
Client/ Server
Services PCS-9705
Subscriber /Publisher
17192 17192 17192

Client-Server Roles
B11
B12
Server side (of Two-party Application-Association)
Client side (of Two-party Application-Association)

－
C1
C1
－
Y
SCSMS Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used Y Y Y
B22 SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used N N N
B23 SCSM: IEC61850-9-2 used Y N Y
B24 SCSM: other N N N
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
Client/ Server
Services PCS-9705
Subscriber /Publisher
B31 Publisher side － O Y
B32 Subscriber side O － Y
Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side O N
17192 17192 17192

－
B42 Subscriber side O － N
Where:
C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by this device
N: Currently not supported by this device
10.3.6.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement
Services Client/Subscriber Server/Publisher PCS-9705
M1
M2
M3
17192 17192 17192
Logical device
Logical node
Data
C2
C3
C4
C2
C3
C4
Y
M4 Data set C5 C5 Y
M5 Substitution O O Y
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M7-4
M7-5
M7-6
17192 17192 17192
data-set-name
data-reference
buffer-overflow
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
M7-7 entryID Y Y Y
M7-8 BufTm N N N
M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y
M7-10 GI Y Y Y
M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
Services Client/Subscriber Server/Publisher PCS-9705
M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
17192 17192 17192

M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M8-6 BufTm N N N
M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y
Logging
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N N N
M10 Log O O N
GSE
M12 GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16
M17 17192 17192 17192

Time
File transfer
M
O
M
O
Y
Where:
C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared
C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
17192 17192 17192

Y: Supported by this device
N: Currently not supported by this device
10.3.6.3 ACSI Services Conformance Statement
Services Server/Publisher PCS-9705
Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M Y
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
S3 Abort M Y
S4 Release M Y
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y
17192 17192 17192

Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M Y
S9 SetDataValues M Y
S10 GetDataDirectory M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O N
S14 CreateDataSet O N
S15
S16 17192 17192 17192

Substitution
DeleteDataSet
GetDataSetDirectory
O
M
N
S17 SetDataValues M Y
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y
S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y
S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y
S22 GetSGValues M/O Y
S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y
S24
17192 17192 17192
Reporting
Buffered report control block
Report M Y
S24-1 data-change M Y
S24-2 qchg-change M Y
S24-3 data-update M Y
S25 GetBRCBValues M Y
S26 SetBRCBValues M Y
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
Unbuffered report control block
S27 Report M Y
S27-1 data-change M Y
S27-2 qchg-change M Y
17192 17192 17192

S27-3 data-update M N
S28 GetURCBValues M Y
S29 SetURCBValues M Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues O N
S31 SetLCBValues O N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime O N
S33 QueryLogAfter O N
S34 GetLogStatusValues O N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
S35
S36
17192 17192 17192
GOOSE control block
SendGOOSEMessage
GetGoReference
M
O
Y
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O N
S38 GetGoCBValues M Y
S39 SetGoCBValuess M Y
Control
S51 Select O N
S52 SelectWithValue M Y
S53 Cancel M Y
S54 Operate M Y
S55
S56 17192 17192 17192

Command-Termination
TimeActivated-Operate
File transfer
O
O
Y
S57 GetFile M/O Y
S58 SetFile O Y
S59 DeleteFile O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues M/O Y
Time
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
SNTP M Y
10.3.7 Logical Nodes

10.3.7.1 Logical Nodes Table
This device supports IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. The actual
Nodes
17192 17192 17192
instantiation of each logical node is determined by the specific product.
L: System Logical Nodes

PCS-9705
LPHD: Physical device information YES
LLN0: Logical node zero YES
P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions
PDIF: Differential －
PDIR: Direction comparison －
PDIS: Distance －
PDOP: Directional overpower －
PDUP: Directional underpower
17192 17192 17192

－
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency －
PHAR: Harmonic restraint －
PHIZ: Ground detector －
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent －
PMRI Motor restart inhibition －
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision －
POPF: Over power factor －
PPAM: Phase angle measuring －
PSCH: Protection scheme －
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault －
PTEF: Transient earth fault －
17192 17192 17192

PTOC: Time overcurrent
PTOF: Overfrequency
PTOV: Overvoltage
－
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning －
PTTR: Thermal overload －
PTUC: Undercurrent －
PTUV: Undervoltage －
PUPF: Underpower factor －
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
Nodes PCS-9705
PTUF: Underfrequency －
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent －
PVPH: Volts per Hz －
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed －
17192 17192 17192

R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function －
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue －
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary －
RDRS: Disturbance record handling －
RBRF: Breaker failure －
RDIR: Directional element －
RFLO: Fault locator －
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking －
RREC: Autoreclosing －
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing YES
C: Logical Nodes For Control
17192 17192 17192

CALH: Alarm handling
CCGR: Cooling group control
CILO: Interlocking
－
YES
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching －
CSWI: Switch controller YES
G: Logical Nodes For Generic References
GAPC: Generic automatic process control YES
GGIO: Generic process I/O YES
GSAL: Generic security application －
I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving －
17192 17192 17192

IHMI: Human machine interface
ITCI: Telecontrol interface
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface

－
A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control
ANCR: Neutral current regulator －
ARCO: Reactive power control －
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller YES
AVCO: Voltage control －
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
Nodes PCS-9705
M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement
MDIF: Differential measurements －
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics －
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic －
17192 17192 17192

MMTR: Metering －
MMXN: Non phase related measurement YES
MMXU: Measurement YES
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance YES
MSTA: Metering statistics －
S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs －
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) －
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) －
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges －
X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear
TCTR: Current transformer
17192 17192 17192

－
TVTR: Voltage transformer －
Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) －
YLTC: Tap changer YES
YPSH: Power shunt －
YPTR: Power transformer －
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment
ZAXN: Auxiliary network －
ZBAT: Battery －
ZBSH: Bushing －
ZCAB: Power cable －
17192 17192 17192

ZCAP: Capacitor bank
ZCON: Converter
ZGEN: Generator
－
ZGIL: Gas insulated line －
ZLIN: Power overhead line －
ZMOT: Motor －
ZREA: Reactor －
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component －
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
Nodes PCS-9705
ZSAR: Surge arrestor －
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter －
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component －
10.4 DNP3.0 Interface
17192 17192 17192

10.4.1 Overview
The DNP3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol) protocol can support the OSI/EPA model of the ISO
(International Organization for Standards), and it includes four parts: application layer protocol,
transport functions, data link layer protocol and data object library. The DNP3.0 protocol is
recommended to use the Ethernet network. This relay operates as a slave in the system,
responding to commands from a master station.
NOTICE!
For the use of DNP3.0 protocol in this device, please make sure that this protocol is
enabled in device configuration file (DEV) to view and set all the related DNP3.0
communication settings via the menu "Settings" -> "Device Setup" -> "Comm
17192 17192 17192

Settings".
17192 17192 17192

Figure 10.4-1 Enable the configuration of DNP3.0
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0
implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.
The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 3 of the protocol, plus some of
the features from level 4. The DNP3.0 communication uses the Ethernet ports (electrical or optical)
at the rear side of this relay.
10.4.2 Link Layer Functions
17192 17192 17192

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.
10.4.3 Transport Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.
10.4.4 Application Layer Functions

10.4.4.1 Function Code
Function Code Function

0 (0x00) Confirm
1 (0x01) Read
2 (0x02) Write
3 (0x03) Select
4 (0x04) Operate
17192 17192 17192 5 (0x05)

6 (0x06)
13 (0x0D)
Direct Operate
Direct Operate No Acknowledgment
Cold Restart
14 (0x0E) Warm Restart
20 (0x14) Enable Unsolicited Responses
21 (0x15) Disable Unsolicited Responses
22 (0x16) Assign Class
23 (0x17) Delay Measurement
10.4.4.2 Supported Object List
The supported object groups and object variations are show in the following table.
Request: Master may issue/Outstation shall parse
17192 17192 17192

Function code: decimalism
Qualifier code: hexadecimal
OBJECT GROUP & VARIATION REQUEST

Group/Variation No. Description Function code Qualifier code
1 (read) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
1 0 Binary Input: Any Variation
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
00, 01 (start ~ stop)
1 1 Binary Input: Packed format 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication

1 2 Binary Input: With flags 1 (read)
2 0 Binary Input Event: Any Variation 1 (read)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17192 17192 17192

2 1 Binary Input Event: Without time 1 (read)
2 2 Binary Input Event: With absolute time 1 (read)
2 3 Binary Input Event: With relative time 1 (read)
10 0 Binary output: Any Variation 1 (read)
10 0 Binary output: Any Variation 1 (read)
10 1 Binary output: Packed format 2 (write) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
3 (select)
Binary Command: Control relay output 4 (operate) 17, 28 (index)
12 1
block (CROB) 5 (direct op)
17192 17192 17192

30 0 Analog Input: Any Variation
6 (dir. op, no ack)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
30 1 Analog Input: 32 ~ bit with flag 1 (read)
30 2 Analog Input: 16 ~ bit with flag 1 (read)
30 3 Analog Input: 32 ~ bit without flag 1 (read)
30 4 Analog Input: 16 ~ bit without flag 1 (read)
Analog Input: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt with 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
30 5 1 (read)
flag 06 (no range, or all)
17192 17192 17192

32 0 Analog Input Event: Any Variation 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
32 1 Analog Input Event: 32 ~ bit without time 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
32 2 Analog Input Event: 16 ~ bit without time 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
Analog Input Event: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt 06 (no range, or all)
32 5 1 (read)
without time 07,08 (limited qty)
34 0 Analog Input Deadband: Any Variation 1 (read)
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication

1 (read)
34 1 Analog Input Deadband: 16 ~ bit
2 (write)
17,28 (index)
17192 17192 17192

1 (read)
2 (write)
17,28 (index)
1 (read)
Analog Input Deadband: Single ~ prec flt 06 (no range, or all)
34 3
~ pt 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
2 (write)
17,28 (index)
40 0 Analog Output Status: Any Variation 1 (read)
40 1 Analog Output Status: 32 ~ bit with flag 1 (read)
40 2 Analog Output Status: 16 ~ bit with flag 1 (read)
17192 17192 17192

40 3
Analog Output Status: single ~ prec flt ~ pt
with flag
1 (read)
3 (select)
4 (operate) 17,28 (index)

41 1 Analog Output: 32 ~ bit
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. Op, no ack) 17,28 (index)
3 (select)
41 2 Analog Output: 16 ~ bit
5 (direct op)
3 (select)
41 3 Analog Output: Single ~ prec ft ~ pt
5 (direct op)
17192 17192 17192

1 (read) 07 (limited qty = 1)
50 1 Time and Data: Absolute time
2 (write) 07 (limited qty = 1)
Time and Data: Absolute time at last
50 3 2 (write) 07 (limited qty = 1)
recorded time
Time and Data CTO: Absolute time,
51 1
synchronized
Time and Data CTO: Absolute time,
51 2
unsynchronized
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication

1 (read)
60 1 Class Objects: Class 0 data 06 (no range, or all)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
17192 17192 17192

60 2 Class Objects: Class 1 data 20 (enable unsol.)
21 (disable unsol.) 06 (no range, or all)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
60 3 Class Objects: Class 2 data 20 (enable unsol.)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
60 4 Class Objects : Class 3 data 20 (enable unsol.)
22 (assign class)
17192 17192 17192

Response: Master shall parse\Outstation may issue
Function code: decimalism
Qualifier code: hexadecimal
OBJECT GROUP & VARIATION RESPONSE

1 0 Binary Input: Any Variation
1 1 Binary Input: Packed format 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
1 2 Binary Input: With flags 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
2 0 Binary Input Event: Any Variation
129 (response)
2 1 Binary Input Event: Without time 17, 28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
129 (response)
17192 17192 17192

2 2 Binary Input Event: With absolute time 17, 28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
129 (response)
2 3 Binary Input Event: With relative time 17, 28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
10 0 Binary output: Any Variation
10 0 Binary output: Any Variation
10 1 Binary output: Packed format
Binary Command: Control relay output 129 (response) echo of request
12 1
block (CROB)
30 0 Analog Input: Any Variation
30 1 Analog Input: 32 ~ bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication

30 2 Analog Input: 16 ~ bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
30 3 Analog Input: 32 ~ bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
30 4 Analog Input: 16 ~ bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
Analog Input: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt with
30 5 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
17192 17192 17192

flag
32 0 Analog Input Event: Any Variation
129 (response)
32 1 Analog Input Event: 32 ~ bit without time 17,28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
129 (response)
32 2 Analog Input Event: 16 ~ bit without time 17,28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
Analog Input Event: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt 129 (response)
32 5 17,28 (index)
without time 130 (unsol. resp)
34 0 Analog Input Deadband: Any Variation
129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)

Analog Input Deadband: Single ~ prec flt 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
17192 17192 17192

34 3
~ pt
40 0 Analog Output Status: Any Variation
40 1 Analog Output Status: 32 ~ bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
40 2 Analog Output Status: 16 ~ bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
Analog Output Status: single ~ prec flt ~
40 3 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
pt with flag
Analog Output: 129 (response) echo of request
41 1
32 ~ bit
41 2
16 ~ bit
41 3
Single ~ prec ft ~ pt
129 (response) 07 (limited qty = 1)
17192 17192 17192

50 1 Time and Data: Absolute time
Time and Data: Absolute time at last

50 3
recorded time
Time and Data CTO: Absolute time, 129 (response)
51 1 07 (limited qty = 1)
synchronized 130 (unsol. resp)
Time and Data CTO: Absolute time, 129 (response)
51 2 07 (limited qty = 1)
unsynchronized 130 (unsol. resp)
60 1 Class Objects: Class 0 data
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication

60 4 Class Objects : Class 3 data
17192 17192 17192

10.4.4.3 Communication Table Configuration
This relay now supports 4 Ethernet clients and 2 serial port clients. Each client can be set the DNP
related communication parameters respectively and be selected the user-defined communication
table. This relay supports a default communication table and 4 user-defined communication tables,
and the default communication table is fixed by the manufacturer and not permitted to configure by
the user.
The user can configure the user-defined communication table through the PCS-Explorer
configuration tool auxiliary software. The object groups “Binary Input”, “Binary Output”, “Analog
Input” and “Analog Output” can be configured according to the practical engineering demand.
10.4.4.4 Analog Input and Output Configuration
To the analog inputs, the attributes “deadband” and “factor” of each analog input can be configured
17192 17192 17192

independently. To the analog outputs, only the attribute “factor” of each analog output needs to be
configured. If the integer mode is adopted for the data formats of analog values (to “Analog Input”,
“Object Variation” is 1, 2 and 3; to “Analog Output”, “Object Variation” is 1 and 2.), the analog
values will be multiplied by the “factor” respectively to ensure their accuracy. And if the float mode
is adopted for the data formats of analog values, the actual float analog values will be sent directly.
The judgment method of the analog input change is as below: Calculate the difference between
the current new value and the stored history value and make the difference value multiply by the
“factor”, then compare the result with the “deadband” value. If the result is greater than the
“deadband” value, then an event message of corresponding analog input change will be created.
In normal communication process, the master can online read or modify a “deadband” value by
reading or modifying the variation in “Group34”.
10.4.4.5 Binary Output Configuration
17192 17192 17192

The remote control signals, logic links and external extended output commands can be configured
into the “Binary Output” group. The supported control functions are listed as below.
Information Point Pulse On/Null Pulse On/Close Pulse On/Trip Latch On/Null Latch Off/Null
Remote Control Not supported Close Trip Close Trip
Logic Link Not supported Set Clear Set Clear
Extended Output See following description
To an extended output command, if a selected command is controlled remotely, this command

point will output a high ~ level pulse. The pulse width can be decided by the “On ~ time” in the
related “Binary Command” which is from the DNP3.0 master. If the “On ~ time” is set as “0”, the
default pulse width is 500ms.
Date: 2018-11-22
10 Communication
10.4.4.6 Unsolicited Messages
This relay does not transmit the unsolicited messages if the related logic setting is set as “0”. If the
unsolicited messages want to be transmitted, the related logic setting should be set as “1” or the
DNP3.0 master will transmit “Enable Unsolicited” command to this relay through “Function Code
20” (Enable Unsolicited Messages). If the “Binary Input” state changes or the difference value of
the “Analog Input” is greater than the “deadband” value, this device will transmit unsolicited
17192 17192 17192

messages. If the DNP3.0 master needs not to receive the unsolicited messages, it should forbid
this relay to transmit the unsolicited messages by setting the related logic setting as “0” or through
the “Function Code 21” (Disable Unsolicited Messages).
10.4.4.7 Class Configuration
If the DNP3.0 master calls the Class0 data, this relay will transmit all actual values of the “Analog
Input”, “Binary Input” and “Analog Output”. The classes of the “Analog Input” and “Binary Input”
can be defined by modifying relevant settings. In communication process, the DNP3.0 master can
online modify the class of an “Analog Input” or a “Binary Input” through “Function Code 22” (Assign
Class).
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
11 Installation
11 Installation
Table of Contents
17192 17192 17192

11 Installation ................................................................................... 11-a
11.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 11-1
11.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................ 11-1
11.3 Check Shipment ............................................................................................ 11-2
11.4 Material and Tools Required ........................................................................ 11-2
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions .................................................. 11-2
11.6 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................. 11-3
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring................................................................. 11-5
11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines ........................................................................................................11-5
17192 17192 17192

11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding .............................................................................................................11-5
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ....................................................................................11-6
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation ..............................................................................11-6
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring .........................................................................................................11-7
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables ...............................................................................................11-7
List of Figures
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of full width PCS-9705 (unit: mm) ................................................11-3
17192 17192 17192

Figure 11.6-2 Dimensions of half width PCS-9705 (unit: mm) ...............................................11-4
Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot ...................11-4
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system .................................................................................11-6
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this device ..........................................................................11-6
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination ............................................................................11-7
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables ....................................11-8
Date: 2018-11-22
11 Installation
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
11 Installation
11.1 Overview
The device must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.
Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the
front of the device are easily accessible.
Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the requirements regarding place of
17192 17192 17192

installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the equipment and terminated correctly
and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in
this section.
11.2 Safety Information

Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe
the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when handling the
equipment.
In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering
configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules
17192 17192 17192

and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC.
WARNING!
ONLY insert or withdraw a module while the device power supply is switched off. To this
end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the PWR module.
NOTICE!
Industry packs and ribbon cables may ONLY be replaced on a workbench for electronic
equipment. Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in
the unit's housing.
NOTICE!
Jumper links may ONLY be changed on a workbench for electronic equipment.
17192 17192 17192

Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in the unit's
housing.
NOTICE!
A module can ONLY be inserted in the slot designated in the chapter 6. Components
can be damaged or destroyed by inserting module in a wrong slot.
The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:
 Should boards have to be removed from this device installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV
switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)
beforehand.
Date: 2018-11-22
11 Installation
 Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.
 Only works on the board that has been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed
for electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,
however, while inserting or withdrawing units.
 Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in
electrostatic screened packing materials.
17192 17192 17192

11.3 Check Shipment
Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR
Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be
found.
Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,
lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or
agent.
If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing
in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the
permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Chapter “Technical Data”.
17192 17192 17192

11.4 Material and Tools Required
The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly
instructions.
A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs
provided (if this device is mounted in cubicles).
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions

NOTICE!
Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of this device.
The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the
17192 17192 17192

human machine interface of the equipment.
There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of
electronic boards.
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient
conditions, such as:
 The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).
 Surge voltages of high amplitude and short rise time, extreme changes of temperature, high
levels of humidity, severe vibration and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as
far as possible.
Date: 2018-11-22
11 Installation
 Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.
The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically
(visibility of markings).
11.6 Mechanical Installation

NOTICE!
17192 17192 17192

It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cutout in the cubicle for
heat emission of this device.
This device is made of a single layer 4U chassis. Following figure shows the dimensions and
cutout size in the cubicle of this device for reference in mounting.
482.6 (230)
465
Front Side
101.6
177
17192 17192 17192 465±0.2

451-0+0.4
4-Ø6.8
101.6±0.1
Cut-Out
179 +0.4
-0
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of full width PCS-9705 (unit: mm)
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
11 Installation
Front Side
17192 17192 17192
Cut-Out
17192 17192 17192
Figure 11.6-2 Dimensions of half width PCS-9705 (unit: mm)
The following figure shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding
slot.
17192 17192 17192

Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot
In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have
been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that
have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.
Date: 2018-11-22
11 Installation
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring

11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines
NOTICE!
All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.
17192 17192 17192

Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.
On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of
other apparatus.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.
17192 17192 17192

Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.
NOTICE!
If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts of it
forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission of
interference by the devices installed and reduce their immunity to induced interference.
Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 11.7-1).
The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.
17192 17192 17192

NOTICE!
For metallic connection, please observe the voltage difference of both materials
according to the electrochemical code.
The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a
grounding strip (braided copper).
Date: 2018-11-22
11 Installation
17192 17192 17192
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system
17192 17192 17192

11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device
There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be
connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing
is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed.
There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this device, and the sign is “GND”. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this device. Therefore, the ground terminal on the
rear panel (see Figure 11.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.
17192 17192 17192 Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this device
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.
The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.
Date: 2018-11-22
11 Installation
Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting
them firmly to the items to be connected.
The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.
The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.
17192 17192 17192 Press/pinch fit

cable terminal
Braided
copper strip Terminal bolt
Contact surface
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring
There are several types of cables that are used for connection of this device. Recommendation of
 17192 17192 17192

cable is:
AC current input: stranded conductor, 2.5mm2 ~ 4.0mm2 lead
 AC voltage input: stranded conductor, 1.5mm2 lead
 Power supply, binary input & output: stranded conductor, 1.0mm2 ~ 2.5mm2 lead
 Earthing connection: braided copper cable, 2.5mm2 ~ 6.0mm2 lead
 Serial communication: 4-core shielded cable
 Electrical Ethernet communication: 4-pair twisted shielded cable (category 5E)
NOTICE!
For 4.0mm2 lead, ONLY dedicated terminal cable lug provided by NR Electric can be
17192 17192 17192

adopted.
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables
DANGER!
NEVER allow an open current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
device while the primary system is live. Open CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage that causes death.
A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into
a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter “Hardware” for
Date: 2018-11-22
11 Installation
further details about the pin defines of these connectors.
The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.
17192 17192 17192
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
12 Commissioning
12 Commissioning
Table of Contents
17192 17192 17192

12 Commissioning ........................................................................... 12-a
12.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Safety Instructions ...................................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Commission Tools ....................................................................................... 12-2
12.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................ 12-2
12.5 Product Checks ........................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.1 With the Device De-energized ......................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.2 With the Device Energized ............................................................................................... 12-5
12.5.3 On-load Checks................................................................................................................ 12-7
17192 17192 17192

12.6 Final Checks ................................................................................................ 12-7
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
12 Commissioning
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
12 Commissioning
12.1 Overview
This device is numerical in their design, implementing all functions in software. The device
employs a high degree self-checking so in the unlikely event of a failure, it will give an alarm.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for
completion as required.
17192 17192 17192

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the
safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
12.2 Safety Instructions
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits MUST be short-circuited BEFORE the current

leads to the device are disconnected.
WARNING!
ONLY qualified personnel should work on or near this device. This personnel MUST be
17192 17192 17192

familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this manual.
During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high voltage.
Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from improper
behavior.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
 The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.
 Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
 Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply
voltage (storage capacitors!)
17192 17192 17192

 The limit values stated in the Chapter “Technical Data” must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.
 When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and
may be close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are disconnected
from the device unless expressly stated.
Date: 2018-11-22
12 Commissioning
12.3 Commission Tools

NOTICE!
Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.
 Minimum required equipment
17192 17192 17192

 Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.
 Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0~440V and
0~250V respectively.
 Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).
 Phase angle meter.
 Phase rotation meter.
 Optional equipment
 An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance test when required).
 A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
17192 17192 17192

tested, if this is to be used, and will save considerable time during commissioning).
 EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being
tested).
 Tester: HELP-9000.
12.4 Setting Familiarization

When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu
structure of this device is contained in Chapter “Operation Theory” and Chapter “Settings”.
With the front cover in place, all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED
indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault
and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be
17192 17192 17192

entered before changes can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as

PCS-9700 HMI software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of
data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on
disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user
manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become
familiar with its operation.
Date: 2018-11-22
12 Commissioning
12.5 Product Checks

These product checks cover all aspects of the device that should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the device prior to commissioning, it is
17192 17192 17192

advisable to make a copy of the settings to allow them restoration later. This could be done by
extracting the settings from the device itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.
12.5.1 With the Device De-energized
This device is numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can be
kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function tests
are carried out according to user’s correlative regulations.
The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first
put into service.
 Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by
17192 17192 17192

self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.
 User interfaces test
 Binary input circuits and output circuits test
 AC input circuits test
 Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.
 Measuring elements test
 Timers test
 Conjunctive tests
17192 17192 17192

These tests are performed after the device is connected with the primary equipment and other
external equipment.
 On load test.
 Phase sequence check and polarity check.
12.5.1.1 Visual Inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the device case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed are
necessary.
Date: 2018-11-22
12 Commissioning
 Device panel
Carefully examine the device panel, device inside and other parts inside to see that no
physical damage has occurred since installation.
 Panel wiring
Check the conducting wire that is used in the panel to assure that their cross section meeting
17192 17192 17192

the requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.
 Device plug-in modules
Check each plug-in module of the equipment on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.
 Earthing cable
Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.
 Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button
Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons
17192 17192 17192

work normally and smoothly.
12.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required)
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:
 Voltage transformer circuits
 Current transformer circuits
 DC power supply
 Optic-isolated control inputs
 17192 17192 17192

Output contacts
Communication ports
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this device, and do the Insulation resistance test for each
circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the device.
Date: 2018-11-22
12 Commissioning
12.5.1.3 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant device diagram and scheme diagram.
Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the
customer’s normal practice.
17192 17192 17192

12.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply
WARNING!
Energize this device ONLY if the power supply is within the specified operating range in
the chapter 2.
The device only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the device’s
nominal power supply rating.
The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Chapter “Technical Data”,
before energizing the device, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.
Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Chapter “Technical Data”. See
this section for further details about the parameters of the power supply.
17192 17192 17192

12.5.2 With the Device Energized
The following groups of checks verify that the device hardware and software is functioning
correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the device.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the device for these
checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display
Connect the device to DC power supply correctly and turn the device on. Check program version
and forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.
12.5.2.2 Date and Time
17192 17192 17192

If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “Clock”.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will
be maintained. Therefore, when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct
and not need to set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the device for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.
Date: 2018-11-22
12 Commissioning
12.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up, the green LED “HEALTHY” should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the device is healthy.
The device has latched signal devices that remember the state of the trip, auto-reclose when the
device was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore, these indicators may also illuminate
when the auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
17192 17192 17192

proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that that LED because it is known to be operational.
It is likely that alarms related to voltage transformer supervision will not reset at this stage.
12.5.2.4 Testing HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs
Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the “HEALTHY” LED is lighting in green. We
need to emphasize that the “HEALTHY” LED is always lighting in operation course except that the
equipment find serious errors in it.
Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter “Supervision”, the “ALARM” LED will
light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the “ALARM” LED extinguishes.
12.5.2.5 Testing AC Current Inputs
17192 17192 17192

NOTICE!
The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental
operation of the associated circuit breaker.
This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the devices menu.
12.5.2.6 Testing AC Voltage Inputs
NOTICE!
The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental
operation of the associated circuit breaker.
17192 17192 17192

This test verified that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the devices menu.
12.5.2.7 Testing Binary Inputs
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the equipment are functioning correctly.
The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for
terminal numbers.
Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range.
Date: 2018-11-22
12 Commissioning
The status of each binary input can be viewed using device menu. Sign “1” denotes an energized
input and sign “0” denotes a de-energized input.
12.5.3 On-load Checks
The objectives of the on-load checks are:
1. Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.
2.
3.
17192 17192 17192
Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).
Check the polarity of each current transformer.
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the device in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.
17192 17192 17192

12.6 Final Checks
After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the device in order to perform the wiring
verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the
relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the device has been restored to service.
If the device is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the device is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records and alarms have been cleared and LED’s has been
reset before leaving the device.
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
12 Commissioning
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
13 Maintenance
13 Maintenance
Table of Contents
17192 17192 17192

13 Maintenance ................................................................................ 13-1
13.1 Appearance Check ...................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Failure Tracing and Repair .......................................................................... 13-1
13.3 Replace Failed Modules .............................................................................. 13-2
13.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 13-3
13.5 Storage ......................................................................................................... 13-3
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192

Date: 2018-11-22
13 Maintenance
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
13 Maintenance
This device is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and signal
processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output relays
are hermetically sealed.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
17192 17192 17192

rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are
not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.
13.1 Appearance Check

 The device case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed
well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly
fixed in the case. Device terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel
with very good feeling can be operated flexibly.
 It is only allowed to plug or withdraw device board when the supply is reliably switched off.
Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the
17192 17192 17192

primary system is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the
device board when it is unnecessary.
 Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual
inline components must be well plugged.
13.2 Failure Tracing and Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the “Superv State” screen on the LCD.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:
17192 17192 17192

 Test circuit connections are correct
 Modules are securely inserted in position
 Correct DC power voltage is applied
 Correct AC inputs are applied
 Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual

Date: 2018-11-22
13 Maintenance
13.3 Replace Failed Modules
WARNING!
Module can ONLY be replaced while the device power supply is switched off.
ONLY appropriately, trained and qualified personnel can perform the replacement by
17192 17192 17192

strictly observing the precautions against electrostatic discharge.
WARNING!
Five seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be
present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
CAUTION!
Take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wristband and placing modules
on an earthed conductive mat when handling a module. Otherwise, electronic
components could be damaged.
17192 17192 17192

CAUTION!
Check the device configuration after a replacement of module. Unintended operation of

device may occur.
If the failure is identified to be in the device module and the user has spare modules, the user can
recover the device by replacing the failed modules.
Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, MON, BI, BO, etc.)
and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the MON module replaced should
have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have the
same ratings.
17192 17192 17192

The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu “Information”->“Version Info”.
 Replacing a module
1. Switch off the DC power supply
2. Disconnect the trip outputs
3. Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs
4. Unscrew the module connector
5. Unplug the connector from the target module.
Date: 2018-11-22
13 Maintenance
6. Unscrew the module.
7. Pull out the module
8. Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.
9. After replacing the MON module, input the application-specific setting values again.
 Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)
17192 17192 17192

1.
2.
Open the device front panel
Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.
3. Detach the HMI module from the device
4. Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
13.4 Cleaning
Before cleaning the device, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean
the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.
13.5 Storage
17192 17192 17192

The spare device or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard
60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40°C to +70°C, but the temperature of from 0°C
to +40°C is recommended for long-term storage.
17192 17192 17192

Date: 2018-11-22
13 Maintenance
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
Table of Contents
17192 17192 17192

14 Decommissioning and Disposal ................................................ 14-a
14.1 Decommissioning ........................................................................................ 14-1
14.2 Disposal........................................................................................................ 14-1
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
14.1 Decommissioning
DANGER!
Switch OFF the circuit breaker for primary CTs and VTs BEFORE disconnecting the
cables of AI module.
17192 17192 17192

WARNING!
Switch OFF the external miniature circuit breaker of device power supply BEFORE
disconnecting the power supply cable connected to the PWR module.
WARNING!
KEEP an adequate safety distance to live parts of the power substation.
1. Switching off
To switch off this device, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
2. Disconnecting Cables
3.
17192 17192 17192
Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
Dismantling
The device rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
14.2 Disposal
NOTICE!
Strictly observe all local and national laws and regulations when disposing the device.
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
Document Program Release
Description of Change
Version Version Date
17192 17192 17192

R2.00 R2.10 2013-09-10 Form the original manual.
Section 4.1: Add "Alm_Self-Check";
Section 6.3.4: Change binary input contact definition;
Section 7.2.14: Change settings' names;
R2.10.004
R2.01 2014-01-08 Section 7.3.4: Add "Spare Links";
(APP 1, 2, 3)
Section 7.2.16: Add "Misc Settings";
Section 8.2.6: Change content according to the changes of menu
tree;
Add RSYN check mode;
R2.10.004
Add BCU subtypes (APP 4, 5);
(APP 1, 2, 3)
R2.10 2014-03-28 Add half width chassis;
R2.11.001
Add & change certain signals & settings;
(APP 4, 5)
Update structure & description;
R2.10.005
17192 17192 17192

(APP 1, 2, 3) Add note for the terminal description of the BI module;
R2.11 2014-06-19
R2.11.002 Update the template of debugging port
(APP 4, 5)
R2.10.007
(APP 1, 2, 3)
R2.12 2014-11-03 Update the website address and the technical data.
R2.11.002
(APP 4, 5)
R2.10.007
(APP 1, 2, 3) Update the company address and the factory address.
R2.13 2014-12-31
R2.11.002 Update the diagram of BI module.
(APP 4, 5)
⚫ Update safety notes & warning messages
⚫ Add device energy consumption
17192 17192 17192

⚫ Update standards of Insulation Test & Electromagnetic
Capability
⚫ Add logic diagram, description of I/O signals & settings in the
R2.10.009
chapter "Operation Theory"
(APP 1, 2, 3)
R2.20 2015-08-28 ⚫ Update supervision alarm information
R2.11.002
⚫ Update binary output information
(APP 4, 5)
⚫ Update binary input information
⚫ Update settings' range & description
⚫ Update menu information
⚫ Add shortcut key function
⚫ Update communication interfaces & protocols information
Date: 2018-11-22

⚫ Reorganize and clarify the "Module Configuration (for
EXAMPLE only)" which is NOT for design reference in the
R2.10.009
chapter "Hardware".
(APP 1, 2, 3)
R2.21 2015-10-19 ⚫ Add a notice for the AC AI module (13VT)
R2.11.002
17192 17192 17192

⚫ Update chassis protection level
(APP 4, 5)
⚫ Update terminal connecter specification
⚫ Update cable wiring size
R2.10.009 ⚫ Add the configuration method in the MON module for IRIG-B
(APP 1, 2, 3) time synchronization signal's reception mode.
R2.22 2015-12-30
R2.11.002 ⚫ Update the DCAI module's (NR4418D) technical data and
(APP 4, 5) hardware description.
R2.10.012 ⚫ Update port transmission distance description
(APP 1, 2, 3) ⚫ Update certifications
R2.30 2016-08-23
R2.11.002 ⚫ Update MON module PCB version
(APP 4, 5) ⚫ Rearrange the setting lists and add default values
⚫ Add circuit breaker wear function
R2.10.012
⚫ Update AC Voltage Input specifications
(APP 1, 2, 3)
R2.31 2016-09-29 ⚫ Update maximum & minimum values description
17192 17192 17192

R2.11.002
⚫ Add a notice of the NET-DSP module application
(APP 4, 5)
⚫ Update settings descriptions
R2.10.015
(APP 1, 2, 3) ⚫ Add NR4106MD MON module
R2.32 2017-04-21
R2.11.002 ⚫ Update MON modules terminal description
(APP 4, 5)
R2.10.016
(APP 1, 2, 3)
R2.33 2017-07-13 ⚫ Add the setting "Cfg_NetPorts_Bond"
R2.11.005
(APP 4, 5)
⚫ Revise the setting description of "25.U_Diff"
⚫ Update alarm liste
R2.10.021 ⚫ Update default pin definition in BI module
17192 17192 17192

(APP 1, 2, 3) ⚫ Add phase rotation specifications
R2.34 2018-05-22
⚫ Remove mobile disk function
⚫ Add Daylight Saving Time (DST) settings
R2.11.005
No modification
(APP 4, 5)

Date: 2018-11-22

⚫ Delete loop check mode and update synchronism check I/O
signals and settings;
R2.10.023
⚫ Add phase angle display in “Measurments” menu;
(APP 1, 2, 3)
R2.35 2018-11-22 ⚫ Add "MOT Info" menu;
17192 17192 17192

⚫ Modify “SLD Control” steps.
R2.11.005
No modification
(APP 4, 5)
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
Date: 2018-11-22
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192
17192 17192 17192

Date: 2018-11-22

PCS-9705 X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X R2.35

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCS-9705 X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X R2.35

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

9 2 9 2 9 2

Health and Safety

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Instructions and Warnings

PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit i

Securely earth the device earthing terminal.

ii PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit

 Printed circuit board

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing

Copyright © 2018 NR. All rights reserved.

Headquarters: 69, Suyuan Avenue, Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China

P/N: ZL_PCS-9705_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X Version: R2.35

PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit iii

All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below.

8 Human Machine Interface

iv PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit

The following symbols may be used in drawings:

BI Binary signal via opto-coupler

XXX Output signal

PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit v

1 9 IL1, IL2, IL3, IN

vi PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit

1.2.2 Configurable Function .......................................................................................................... 1-6

1.2.3 Miscellaneous Function........................................................................................................ 1-6

1.2.4 Communication .................................................................................................................... 1-7

1.3 Features............................................................................................................ 1-7

Figure 1.1-3 Typical application diagram 1 of PCS-9705 (General, 13VT)............................. 1-2

Figure 1.1-4 Typical application diagram 2 of PCS-9705 (General, 13VT)............................. 1-3

PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit 1-a

1-b PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit

Clock Synchronization Bus

Figure 1.1-1 Typical Ethernet networking scheme

App2 General (13VT)

Double branches for the low-voltage side of

PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit 1-1

Application Subtype Arrangement Analog input source

Application diagrams of PCS-9705 are listed in the following figures.

Figure 1.1-3 Typical application diagram 1 of PCS-9705 (General, 13VT)

1-2 PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit

Figure 1.1-4 Typical application diagram 2 of PCS-9705 (General, 13VT)

Figure 1.1-5 Typical application diagram of PCS-9705 (Dual bays, 7CT/8VT)

PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit 1-3

Figure 1.1-7 Typical application diagram 1 of PCS-9705 (Extended General, 24VT)

Figure 1.1-8 Typical application diagram 2 of PCS-9705 (Extended General, 24VT)

1-4 PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit

4U Ua, Ub, Uc and external residual voltage input (UN)

4I Ia, Ib, Ic and external residual current input (IN)

9 2 Monophase voltage input

Please consult the corresponding Manufacture Ordering Table or NR sales

Table 1.2-1 Maximal configuration of PCS-9705 (4U 19" rack)

4CT + 5VT 13VT 7CT + 8VT

PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit 1-5

Configuration App 1 App 2 App 3

 Transducer input in DC for temperature, humidity, etc.

1.2.2 Configurable Function

 Programmable binary output

 Device power supply supervision

Clock synchronization methods

 IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level

 PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via optical coupler

 PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical coupler

 SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network

1-6 PCS-9705 Bay Control Unit